Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 354

AN5006-20

Small-Sized Integrated Access


Device

EPON Configuration Guide


Version: A/1

Code: MN000001807

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

August 2014
Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.


We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China


Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.


(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be


reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface

Related Documentation
Document Description

Introduces the AN5006-20s network location, functional


AN5006-20 Small-Sized
features, hardware structure, application model, equipment
Integrated Access Device
configuration, network management system and technical
Product Description
specifications.

Introduces the appearance, structure, functions, technical


AN5006-20 Small-Sized
specifications, and usage method for the AN5006-20s
Integrated Access Device
cabinet, PDP, subrack, cards, cables and wires, facilitating
Hardware Description
users mastery of the hardware features of the equipment.

Introduces the overall installation and verifying procedure


from unpacking inspection to power-on examination after
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
the AN5006-20 is delivered on site, and provides reference
Integrated Access Device
information (e.g. safety principles and wiring scheme of a
Installation Guide
variety of interfaces) to guide users to install the
equipment.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Introduces how to install the AN5006-20 and how to


Integrated Access Device Quick connect and lay out wires and cables for it using
Installation Guide illustrations.
Introduces how to configure the MSAN services supported
by the AN5006-20 via the ANM2000, including basic
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
equipment configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device MSAN
service configuration, multicast service configuration and
Configuration Guide
software upgrade configuration, so as to instruct users on
various service startup and software upgrade operations.

I
Document Description

Introduces how to configure the EPON services supported


by the AN5006-20 via the ANM2000, including basic
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
equipment configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device EPON
service configuration, multicast service configuration and
Configuration Guide
software upgrade configuration, so as to instruct users on
various service startup and software upgrade operations.

Introduces how to configure the GPON services supported


by the AN5006-20 via the ANM2000, including basic
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
equipment configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device GPON
service configuration, multicast service configuration and
Configuration Guide
software upgrade configuration, so as to instruct users on
various service startup and software upgrade operations.

II
Version
Version Description

Initial version.
A Version information of the ANM2000:
V3.0R2 Build05.07.06.06SP9

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Commissioning engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u xDSL access principle

u Ethernet switch technology

u Computer network technology

u IP protocol

u V5 protocol

u PON technology

III
Conventions

Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention
FiberHome AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access
AN5006-20
Device
FiberHome e-Fim ANM2000 Network Management
ANM2000
System

MCU-EPON Manage Control Card

MCU-GPON Manage Control Card

MCU-EPON2 Manage Control Card

MCU-GPON2 Manage Control Card

MCUA Manage Control Card

MCUB Manage Control Card

MCUC Manage Control Card

MCUD Manage Control Card

AD32 32 Lines ADSL2+ Card


AD64 64 Lines ADSL2+ Card
CASA 32 Ports ADSL2+ and POTS Combo Board
VD32 32 Lines VDSL Card
POTS32 32 Ports POTS Card
POTS 64 Ports POTS Card
HD32A 32-port SHDSL Interfacing Card

HDT8A High Bit Rate Digital TDM 8A Card

PWRB Power Card (Type B)

FANB Fan Unit


HCU-20 Environment monitoring device

IV
Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic


Caution
interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

Jump Jumps to another step.

Cascading
Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
The service signal is unidirectional.
service

V
Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Related Documentation ...................................................................................I

Version ..........................................................................................................III

Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III

Conventions ................................................................................................. IV

1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel .........................................1-1

1.1 Logging in the Console ..................................................................1-2

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console.........................................1-2


1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console.....................................1-6

1.2 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel ...........................1-7

1.2.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................1-7


1.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................1-8
1.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................1-8
1.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................1-11
1.2.5 Authenticating and Authorizing an ONU .........................1-11
1.2.6 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN........................1-13
1.2.7 Configuring ONU Management VLAN ............................1-14
1.2.8 Adding the Static Route .................................................1-15
1.2.9 Configuration Result ......................................................1-15

1.3 Logging into the ANM2000...........................................................1-16

1.4 Description of the Network Management GUI ...............................1-16

2 Adding Equipment .......................................................................................2-1

2.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................................2-2

2.2 Configuration Flow.........................................................................2-2

2.3 Adding a Logical Domain ...............................................................2-3

2.4 Adding a System............................................................................2-5

2.5 Adding a Module............................................................................2-6

2.6 Adding Cards.................................................................................2-7


2.6.1 Adding Cards Automatically .............................................2-7
2.6.2 Adding Cards Manually ....................................................2-8

2.7 Authorizing Cards ........................................................................2-10

2.7.1 Authorizing Present Cards .............................................2-11


2.7.2 Pre-authorizing Non-present Cards ................................2-11

2.8 Configuring SNMP Trap Receiver Address ...................................2-12

2.9 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-13

2.10 Synchronizing Time .....................................................................2-14

2.11 Saving Configuration to Flash ......................................................2-15

3 Configuring Voice Services ..........................................................................3-1

3.1 Common Configuration ..................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN..........................3-2

3.2 Configuring NGN Voice Service Example - H.248 ...........................3-3

3.2.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................3-3


3.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................3-4
3.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................3-6
3.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-11
3.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................3-11
3.2.6 Enabling the POTS port .................................................3-12
3.2.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................3-13
3.2.8 Configuring Voice VLAN.................................................3-14
3.2.9 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform
Parameters....................................................................3-14
3.2.10 Configuring IP Addresses of the Voice Service ...............3-15
3.2.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-16
3.2.12 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ............................3-16
3.2.13 Configuring Voice Port ...................................................3-17
3.2.14 Configuration Result ......................................................3-18
3.2.15 Checking Voice Equipment Status..................................3-18
3.2.16 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service......................3-19
3.2.17 Checking DSP Channel Status.......................................3-19
3.2.18 Checking NGN User Port Status ....................................3-20

3.3 Configuring NGN Voice Service Example - SIP.............................3-22

3.3.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................3-22


3.3.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................3-23
3.3.3 Planning Data ................................................................3-24
3.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-29
3.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................3-30
3.3.6 Enabling the POTS port .................................................3-31
3.3.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................3-32
3.3.8 Configuring Voice VLAN.................................................3-33
3.3.9 Configuring the SIP Server.............................................3-33
3.3.10 Configuring IP Addresses of the Voice Service ...............3-34
3.3.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-35
3.3.12 Configuring SIP Digitmap ...............................................3-36
3.3.13 Configuring Voice Port ...................................................3-37
3.3.14 Configuration Result ......................................................3-37
3.3.15 Checking Voice Equipment Status..................................3-38
3.3.16 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service......................3-38
3.3.17 Checking DSP Channel Status.......................................3-39
3.3.18 Checking NGN User Port Status ....................................3-40

3.4 Common Configuration ................................................................3-41

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters........................3-42


3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer ...........................................3-43
3.4.3 Configuring DSP Profile .................................................3-43
3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters ..........................................3-44
3.4.5 Configuring POTS Common Parameters........................3-45
3.4.6 Configuring POS Telephone Number..............................3-46
3.4.7 Configuring IPT Number ................................................3-46
3.4.8 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.......3-47
3.4.9 2833 Configuration ........................................................3-48

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration..................................................3-48

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication ...........................3-49


3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing
Parameters....................................................................3-49
3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ..........................3-50

3.6 SIP Configuration.........................................................................3-51

3.6.1 SIP Advanced Configuration ..........................................3-51


3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ..............................3-52

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-52


3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User ....................................3-53

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information .......................................3-54

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ....3-54


3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ............................3-54
3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port...3-55
3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information.....................3-56

4 Configuring Data Services ...........................................................................4-1

4.1 Common Configuration ..................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN..........................4-2

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent


Mode .............................................................................................4-3

4.2.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................4-3


4.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................4-4
4.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................4-4
4.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-10
4.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................4-12
4.2.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................4-12
4.2.7 Configuring an ADSL Line Profile ...................................4-12
4.2.8 Binding an ADSL Port to the ADSL Line Profile...............4-13
4.2.9 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile .............................4-14
4.2.10 Binding an ADSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile ...........4-15
4.2.11 Configuring a PVC Profile ..............................................4-16
4.2.12 Binding an ADSL Port to the PVC Profile ........................4-17
4.2.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................4-18
4.2.14 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-22
4.2.15 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-23
4.2.16 Configuration Result ......................................................4-24

4.3 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode ......4-25

4.3.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................4-25


4.3.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................4-25
4.3.3 Planning Data ................................................................4-26
4.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-32
4.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................4-34
4.3.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................4-34
4.3.7 Configuring an ADSL Line Profile ...................................4-34
4.3.8 Binding an ADSL Port to the ADSL Line Profile...............4-35
4.3.9 Configuring a PVC Profile ..............................................4-37
4.3.10 Binding an ADSL Port to the PVC Profile ........................4-37
4.3.11 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile .............................4-39
4.3.12 Binding an ADSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile ...........4-39
4.3.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................4-40
4.3.14 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-44
4.3.15 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-45
4.3.16 Configuration Result ......................................................4-46

4.4 Example of Configuring VDSL Data Services in the 1:1 Translation


Mode ...........................................................................................4-47

4.4.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................4-47


4.4.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................4-48
4.4.3 Planning Data ................................................................4-48
4.4.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-54
4.4.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................4-55
4.4.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................4-55
4.4.7 Configuring the Basic Profile of the VDSL Line ...............4-55
4.4.8 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Line Basic Profile .......4-56
4.4.9 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-58
4.4.10 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Service Profile ...........4-58
4.4.11 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile .............................4-60
4.4.12 Binding a VDSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile .............4-60
4.4.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................4-62
4.4.14 Enabling the VDSL Port .................................................4-66
4.4.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-68

4.5 Example of Configuring VDSL Data Services in the N:1 Translation


Mode ...........................................................................................4-68

4.5.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................4-68


4.5.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................4-69
4.5.3 Planning Data ................................................................4-69
4.5.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-75
4.5.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................4-76
4.5.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................4-76
4.5.7 Configuring the Basic Profile of the VDSL Line ...............4-76
4.5.8 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Line Basic Profile .......4-77
4.5.9 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-78
4.5.10 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Service Profile ...........4-79
4.5.11 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile .............................4-79
4.5.12 Binding a VDSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile .............4-80
4.5.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................4-81
4.5.14 Enabling the VDSL Port .................................................4-82
4.5.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-83

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service................................................................5-1

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM ........5-2

5.1.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................5-2


5.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................5-3
5.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................5-4
5.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................5-9
5.1.5 Configuring Uplink Port Properties..................................5-11
5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port................................................5-11
5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................5-13
5.1.8 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................5-14
5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-15
5.1.10 Binding an SHDSL Port to the SHDSL Line Profile..........5-15
5.1.11 Configuring a PVC Profile ..............................................5-17
5.1.12 Binding an SHDSL Port to the PVC Profile .....................5-18
5.1.13 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile .............................5-20
5.1.14 Binding an SHDSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile ........5-20
5.1.15 Configuring SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters ........5-22
5.1.16 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................5-23
5.1.17 Configuration Result ......................................................5-26

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM......5-26

5.2.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................5-26


5.2.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................5-27
5.2.3 Planning Data ................................................................5-27
5.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................5-29
5.2.5 Configuring E1 Data.......................................................5-30
5.2.6 Configuring Clock ..........................................................5-31
5.2.7 Enabling an SHDSL Port................................................5-32
5.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-33
5.2.9 Binding an SHDSL Port to the SHDSL Line Profile..........5-34
5.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................5-36
6 Multicast Service Configuration ....................................................................6-1

6.1 Common Configuration ..................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN..........................6-2


6.1.2 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode.................................6-2
6.1.3 Configuring OLT Multicast Default VLAN ..........................6-3

6.2 Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the
Proxy Mode ...................................................................................6-4

6.2.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................6-4


6.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................6-5
6.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................6-6
6.2.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................6-9
6.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................6-10
6.2.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..6-10
6.2.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................6-11
6.2.8 Configuring Multicast Mode............................................6-12
6.2.9 Configuring Multicast Proxy IP Address ..........................6-12
6.2.10 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN................................6-13
6.2.11 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................6-14
6.2.12 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................6-16
6.2.13 Configuration Result ......................................................6-18

6.3 Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the VDSL Card in the
Controlled Mode ..........................................................................6-21

6.3.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................6-21


6.3.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................6-21
6.3.3 Planning Data ................................................................6-22
6.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................6-27
6.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ..........................6-29
6.3.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..6-29
6.3.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN ...................................6-29
6.3.8 Configuring Multicast Mode............................................6-30
6.3.9 Configuring Multicast Proxy IP Address ..........................6-31
6.3.10 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN................................6-31
6.3.11 Configuring Multicast Profile...........................................6-32
6.3.12 Configure Multicast Group Parameters...........................6-33
6.3.13 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters ...........................6-34
6.3.14 Configuring a Port Service VLAN ...................................6-34
6.3.15 Enabling the VDSL Port .................................................6-35
6.3.16 Configuration Result ......................................................6-36

7 Upgrading Card Software.............................................................................7-1

7.1 Precaution .....................................................................................7-2

7.2 Upgrading the Manage Control Card ..............................................7-2

7.2.1 Upgrade Rule ..................................................................7-2


7.2.2 Planning Data ..................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-3
7.2.4 Saving Configuration to Flash ..........................................7-4
7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File.........................7-5
7.2.6 Backing up the System Software......................................7-6
7.2.7 Upgrading the Core Switch Card Software........................7-7
7.2.8 Resetting the Manage Control Card .................................7-9
7.2.9 Checking the Core Switch Card Software Version...........7-10

7.3 Upgrading the Line Card ..............................................................7-10

7.3.1 Upgrade Rule ................................................................7-11


7.3.2 Planning Data ................................................................7-11
7.3.3 Upgrade Flow ................................................................7-12
7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card ...............................7-12
7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card.................................7-14
7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface
Card ..............................................................................7-14

8 Configuring Link Aggregation .......................................................................8-1

8.1 Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode......................8-2

8.1.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................8-2


8.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................8-2
8.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................8-4
8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Core Switch Card ....8-5
8.1.6 Configuring Aggregation Mode.........................................8-6
8.1.7 Configuring Aggregation Port ...........................................8-7
8.1.8 Configuration Result ........................................................8-7

8.2 Example of Configuring Static LACP Aggregation Mode .................8-7

8.2.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................8-8


8.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................8-8
8.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................8-9
8.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................8-11
8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Core Switch Card ..8-11
8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ............................8-12
8.2.7 Configuring LACP Port Parameters ................................8-12
8.2.8 Configuring Aggregation Mode.......................................8-13
8.2.9 Configuring Aggregation Port .........................................8-14
8.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................8-14

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring......................................9-1

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring...............................................9-2

9.1.1 Configuration Rule ...........................................................9-2


9.1.2 Planning Data ..................................................................9-4
9.1.3 Configuration Flow...........................................................9-6
9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile .....................................9-6
9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile ...........................................9-7
9.1.6 Configuration Result ........................................................9-8

9.2 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters............................9-8

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-11

9.4 Rebooting the HCU-20 Card ........................................................9-11

9.5 Configuring the Enabling Status of the Rectifier Module ................9-12

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card...................9-13

9.7 Viewing the Current Alarm of the HCU-20 Card ............................9-13

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card .............................9-14

10 Test Function .............................................................................................10-1

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test ........................................................10-2

10.1.1 Test Rule .......................................................................10-2


10.1.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Test Flow .......................................................................10-2
10.1.4 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test .......................10-3
10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ..........10-4
10.1.6 Test Result.....................................................................10-5

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test.......................................................10-5

10.2.1 Test Rule .......................................................................10-5


10.2.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-5
10.2.3 Test Flow .......................................................................10-6
10.2.4 Configuring Subscriber External Line Test ......................10-6
10.2.5 Checking the External Line Test Result ..........................10-7
10.2.6 Test Result.....................................................................10-8

10.3 Ping Test .....................................................................................10-9

10.3.1 Test Purpose .................................................................10-9


10.3.2 Ping Test .......................................................................10-9
10.3.3 Checking Test Result ................................................... 10-11

Appendix A FTP Operation Guide .............................................................. A-1

A.1 Overview of the Function............................................................... A-1

A.2 Configuration Procedure ............................................................... A-1


Figures

Figure 1-1 The ANM2000 Network Diagram....................................................1-8


Figure 1-2 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel .........................1-11
Figure 1-3 Configuring the Authentication Mode of the PON Port...................1-12
Figure 1-4 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs .....................................................1-13
Figure 1-5 ONU Authorized Successfully ......................................................1-13
Figure 1-6 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN......................................1-14
Figure 1-7 Configuring ONU Management VLAN ..........................................1-15
Figure 1-8 Adding the Static Route ...............................................................1-15
Figure 1-9 The ANM2000 Main Screen .........................................................1-17
Figure 2-1 Flow of Adding Devices..................................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Adding a Logical Domain ...............................................................2-4
Figure 2-3 The Added Logic Domain...............................................................2-4
Figure 2-4 Adding the AN5006-20 System ......................................................2-5
Figure 2-5 The Added System ........................................................................2-6
Figure 2-6 Adding a Module............................................................................2-6
Figure 2-7 The Added Module ........................................................................2-7
Figure 2-8 Result of Physical Configuration Detection .....................................2-8
Figure 2-9 The Subrack View..........................................................................2-8
Figure 2-10 The Subrack View (No Card Added)...............................................2-8
Figure 2-11 Adding Cards Manually ..................................................................2-9
Figure 2-12 Filling in Card Parameters............................................................2-10
Figure 2-13 Setting Card Authorization ...........................................................2-11
Figure 2-14 Completing Card Pre-authorization ..............................................2-12
Figure 2-15 Configuring SNMP Trap Receiver Address ...................................2-13
Figure 2-16 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-13
Figure 2-17 Synchronizing System Time .........................................................2-14
Figure 2-18 Saving Configuration to Flash ......................................................2-15
Figure 3-1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN........................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Network of the H.248 Voice Service ...............................................3-4
Figure 3-3 Flow of H.248 Voice Services.......................................................3-11
Figure 3-4 Modifying Port Enabling in a Batch Manner ..................................3-12
Figure 3-5 Completion of Enabling POTS Port ..............................................3-13
Figure 3-6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN .................................................3-13
Figure 3-7 Configuring Voice VLAN...............................................................3-14
Figure 3-8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters ......3-15
Figure 3-9 Configuring Voice IP ....................................................................3-15
Figure 3-10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-16
Figure 3-11 Configuring RTP Resource Profile................................................3-17
Figure 3-12 Configuring Voice Port .................................................................3-17
Figure 3-13 Checking Voice Equipment Status................................................3-18
Figure 3-14 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service....................................3-19
Figure 3-15 Checking DSP Channel Status.....................................................3-20
Figure 3-16 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-21
Figure 3-17 Network of the SIP Voice Service .................................................3-23
Figure 3-18 Flow of SIP Voice Services ..........................................................3-30
Figure 3-19 Modifying Port Enabling in a Batch Manner ..................................3-31
Figure 3-20 Completion of Enabling POTS Port ..............................................3-32
Figure 3-21 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN .................................................3-32
Figure 3-22 Configuring Voice VLAN...............................................................3-33
Figure 3-23 Configuring SIP Server ................................................................3-34
Figure 3-24 Configuring Voice IP ....................................................................3-35
Figure 3-25 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-35
Figure 3-26 Configuring SIP Digitmap .............................................................3-36
Figure 3-27 Configuring Voice Port .................................................................3-37
Figure 3-28 Checking Voice Equipment Status................................................3-38
Figure 3-29 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service....................................3-39
Figure 3-30 Checking DSP Channel Status.....................................................3-40
Figure 3-31 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-41
Figure 3-32 Configuring POTS Common Parameter........................................3-43
Figure 3-33 Configuring the Voice Timer .........................................................3-43
Figure 3-34 Configuring DSP Profile ...............................................................3-44
Figure 3-35 Configuring Fax Parameters ........................................................3-45
Figure 3-36 Configuring POTS Common Parameters......................................3-45
Figure 3-37 Configuring POS Telephone Number............................................3-46
Figure 3-38 Configuring IPT Number ..............................................................3-47
Figure 3-39 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.....................3-48
Figure 3-40 Configure 2833 ............................................................................3-48
Figure 3-41 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication .........................................3-49
Figure 3-42 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters ......3-50
Figure 3-43 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ........................................3-50
Figure 3-44 SIP Advanced Configuration Diagram ..........................................3-51
Figure 3-45 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ............................................3-52
Figure 3-46 Diagram of Registering / Unregistering the MGC ..........................3-53
Figure 3-47 Diagram of Registering / Unregistering the NGN User...................3-53
Figure 3-48 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ..................3-54
Figure 3-49 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ..........................................3-55
Figure 3-50 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port.................3-56
Figure 3-51 Viewing the Call Statistics Information of Port ...............................3-57
Figure 4-1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN........................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent
Mode .............................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-3 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................4-11
Figure 4-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Mode........................................................................4-12
Figure 4-5 Configuring ADSL Line Profile - ADSL Service in Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in
Transparent Mode........................................................................4-14
Figure 4-7 The Completion of Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL
Service in Transparent Mode .......................................................4-14
Figure 4-8 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile - ADSL Service in Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-9 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in
Transparent Mode........................................................................4-16
Figure 4-10 Configuring PVC Profile - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode ......4-17
Figure 4-11 Binding PVC Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................4-18
Figure 4-12 The Completion of Binding PVC Profile to the ADSL Port for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-18
Figure 4-13 The Selection of Port with PVC Index 0 - ADSL Service in Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-14 PVC Index Selection - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode ...........4-20
Figure 4-15 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN - ADSL Service in
Transparent Mode........................................................................4-22
Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode ............4-23
Figure 4-17 The Completion of Enabling ADSL Port - ADSL Service in
Transparent Mode........................................................................4-23
Figure 4-18 The Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-19 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Tagged Mode..4-26
Figure 4-20 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode .4-33
Figure 4-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the
Tagged Mode...............................................................................4-34
Figure 4-22 Configuring ADSL Line Profile for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode .4-35
Figure 4-23 Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-24 The Completion of Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port for ADSL
Service in the Tag Mode...............................................................4-36
Figure 4-25 Configuring PVC Profile for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode...........4-37
Figure 4-26 Binding PVC Profile to ADSL Port for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-27 The Completion of Binding PVC Profile to the ADSL Port for the ADSL
Service in the Tag Mode...............................................................4-38
Figure 4-28 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-29 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-40
Figure 4-30 The Selection of Port with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-41
Figure 4-31 PVC Index Selection for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode..........4-42
Figure 4-32 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN for ADSL Service
in the Tag Mode ...........................................................................4-44
Figure 4-33 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode .....4-45
Figure 4-34 The Completion of Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in
the Tag Mode...............................................................................4-45
Figure 4-35 The Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-36 Network Diagram of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-37 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-54
Figure 4-38 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-55
Figure 4-39 Configuring VDSL Basic Line Profile for VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-56
Figure 4-40 Binding VDSL Basic Line Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-57
Figure 4-41 The Completion of Binding VDSL Basic Line Profile to VDSL Port for
VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode....................................4-57
Figure 4-42 Configuring VDSL Profile for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-58
Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Service Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-59
Figure 4-44 The Completion of Binding VDSL Service Profile to VDSL Port for
VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode....................................4-59
Figure 4-45 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile for VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-60
Figure 4-46 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-61
Figure 4-47 The Completion of Binding Rate Limiting Profile to VDSL Port for
VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode....................................4-62
Figure 4-48 The Selection of the Port with PVC Index 0 for VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-63
Figure 4-49 PVC Index Selection for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-64
Figure 4-50 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN for VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode ..........................................................4-66
Figure 4-51 Enabling VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-52 The Completion of Enabling VDSL Port For the VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-67
Figure 4-53 Network Diagram of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-69
Figure 4-54 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-75
Figure 4-55 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-76
Figure 4-56 Configuring VDSL Basic Line Profile for VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-77
Figure 4-57 The Completion of Binding VDSL Basic Line Profile to VDSL Port for
VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode ...................................4-78
Figure 4-58 Configuring VDSL Profile for VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-78
Figure 4-59 The Completion of Binding VDSL Service Profile to VDSL Port for
VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode ...................................4-79
Figure 4-60 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile for VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-80
Figure 4-61 The Completion of Binding Rate Limiting Profile to VDSL Port for
VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode ...................................4-81
Figure 4-62 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN for VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode..........................................................4-82
Figure 4-63 The Completion of Enabling VDSL Port For the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-83
Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode .............................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode5-10
Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-11
Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Port - SHDSL Service in ATM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-5 The Completion of Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Mode ..........................................................5-12
Figure 5-6 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-7 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-14
Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-14
Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-15
Figure 5-10 Binding the SHDSL Line Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ..........................................5-16
Figure 5-11 The Completion of Binding the SHDSL Line Profile to SHDSL Port for
the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ....................5-17
Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-18
Figure 5-13 Binding PVC Profile to SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in ATM
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-19
Figure 5-14 Completion of Binding the PVC Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode .............................5-19
Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Mode ..........................................................5-20
Figure 5-16 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in
ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-21
Figure 5-17 Binding the Rate Limiting Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G. SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ..........................................5-22
Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode .............................5-22
Figure 5-19 The Selection of the Port with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service
in the ATM Transparent Mode ......................................................5-23
Figure 5-20 Configuring the PVC Index Selection for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-24
Figure 5-21 The Completion of Configuring the Port Service VLAN for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode .............................5-26
Figure 5-22 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-23 Configuration Flow of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-24 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-31
Figure 5-25 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-26 Enabling SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-27 The Completion of Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Mode .........................................5-33
Figure 5-28 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Mode ...............................................................5-34
Figure 5-29 Binding SHDSL Line Profile to SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in
TDM Transparent Mode ...............................................................5-35
Figure 5-30 The Completion of Binding the SHDSL Line Profile to the SHDSL Port
for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode...............5-35
Figure 6-1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN........................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode...............................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Configuring OLT Multicast Default VLAN ........................................6-4
Figure 6-4 Network Diagram of the ADSL Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode 6-5
Figure 6-5 Flow for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the
Proxy Mode .................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression................6-11
Figure 6-7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Proxy Mode...............6-12
Figure 6-8 Configuring Proxy Multicast Mode ................................................6-12
Figure 6-9 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address - Proxy Mode .............6-13
Figure 6-10 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN - Proxy Mode ........................6-13
Figure 6-11 The Selection of Port with PVC Index 0 ........................................6-14
Figure 6-12 The PVC Index Selection Dialog Box ...........................................6-15
Figure 6-13 The Completion of Configuring a Port Service VLAN - Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-14 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner....................6-17
Figure 6-15 Completion of Enabling ADSL Port...............................................6-17
Figure 6-16 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information .................................6-18
Figure 6-17 Viewing Online Group Information at a Specified Port in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-18 Checking the Core Switch Cards Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-19 Checking the Line Cards Multicast Address Table in the Controlled
Mode ...........................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-20 Network Diagram of the VDSL Multicast Service in the Controlled
Mode ...........................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-21 Flow for Multicast Service Configuration of the VDSL Card in the
Controlled Mode ..........................................................................6-28
Figure 6-22 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression................6-29
Figure 6-23 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Controlled Mode........6-30
Figure 6-24 Configuring Controlled Multicast Mode .........................................6-30
Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address - Controllable Mode....6-31
Figure 6-26 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN - Controllable Mode...............6-32
Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Profile.........................................................6-33
Figure 6-28 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ......................................6-34
Figure 6-29 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters .........................................6-34
Figure 6-30 The Completion of Configuring a Port Service VLAN in the Controlled
Mode ...........................................................................................6-35
Figure 6-31 Completion of Enabling VDSL Port...............................................6-36
Figure 6-32 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal
User ............................................................................................6-37
Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview
User ............................................................................................6-37
Figure 6-34 Viewing Online Group Information at a Specified Port - Controllable
Mode ...........................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-35 Checking the MCU Cards Multicast Address Table in the Controlled
Mode ...........................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-36 Checking the Line Cards Multicast Address Table in the Controlled
Mode ...........................................................................................6-39
Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card ..........................7-4
Figure 7-2 Saving Configuration to Flash ........................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration File.......................................7-6
Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software....................................................7-7
Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Core Switch Card Software......................................7-8
Figure 7-6 Upgrading the Core Switch Card Software Successfully .................7-9
Figure 7-7 Rebooting the Management Control Card.....................................7-10
Figure 7-8 Checking the Core Switch Card Software Version.........................7-10
Figure 7-9 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software ............7-12
Figure 7-10 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch
Manner........................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-11 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card...............................................7-14
Figure 7-12 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card ..........7-15
Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network .........................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Configuration Flow of Manual Aggregation .....................................8-5
Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Core Switch Card - Manual
Aggregation ...................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation .....................8-6
Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Port - Manual Aggregation .......................8-7
Figure 8-6 Static LACP Aggregation Network ..................................................8-8
Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACP Aggregation ............................8-11
Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Core Switch Card Static LACP
Aggregation .................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ..........................................8-12
Figure 8-10 Configuring LACP Port Parameters ..............................................8-13
Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACP Aggregation ............8-14
Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Port - Static LACP Aggregation ..............8-14
Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance............................9-6
Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ..............9-7
Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ....................9-8
Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters..........................9-11
Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-11
Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12
Figure 9-7 Configuring the Enabling Status of the Rectifier Module ................9-12
Figure 9-8 Viewing Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card ........................9-13
Figure 9-9 Viewing Current Alarm of the HCU-20 Card ..................................9-13
Figure 9-10 Viewing Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card...................................9-14
Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test............................10-2
Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-3
Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-4
Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ........................10-4
Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test...........................10-5
Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test...........................................10-6
Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ..............................10-7
Figure 10-8 Checking the External Line Test Result ........................................10-8
Figure 10-9 The Setting of Ping Test Parameters ..........................................10-10
Figure 10-10 Ping Test ................................................................................... 10-11
Figure A-1 Opening the WFTP Software......................................................... A-2
Figure A-2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI .......................................... A-2
Figure A-3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1 ................. A-3
Figure A-4 Entering User Password 1............................................................. A-3
Figure A-5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package........... A-4
Figure A-6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool................................... A-4
Figure A-7 Logging Options ........................................................................... A-5
Tables

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the ANM2000 Management


Channel.........................................................................................1-8
Table 1-2 Common Buttons for Configuration GUI........................................1-18
Table 2-1 Configuration of the AN5006-20 Cards ...........................................2-9
Table 3-1 Planning Data of the H.248 Voice Service ......................................3-6
Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service ........................................3-24
Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode.........4-4
Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode ...............4-26
Table 4-3 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-49
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-70
Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode .............................................................................................5-4
Table 5-2 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-28
Table 6-1 Planning Data of the Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode ...............6-6
Table 6-2 Planning Data of the Multicast Service (in the Controlled Mode)....6-22
Table 7-1 Planning Data of Upgrading the Core Switch Card..........................7-3
Table 7-2 Correspondence Relationships between Upgrade Object and
Download File Type .....................................................................7-11
Table 7-3 Planning Data of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card ...................7-11
Table 8-1 Planning Data of Configuring the Manual Aggregation Mode...........8-3
Table 8-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Static LACP Aggregation Mode....8-9
Table 9-1 Relationship between the Alarm Code and the Parameters of Alarm
Report Threshold / Alarm Eliminating Threshold .............................9-2
Table 9-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance.9-4
Table 9-3 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Parameters....................................................................................9-8
Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters.................................................................10-10
Table 10-2 Ping Test Result.........................................................................10-12
1 Configuring the ANM2000
Management Channel

Before using the ANM2000 to manage the AN5006-20, users need to configure the
ANM2000 management channel using the Console control platform (shortened as
Console in the following sections). The following introduces how to configure the
ANM2000 management channel.

Logging in the Console

Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Logging into the ANM2000

Description of the Network Management GUI

Version: A/1 1-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

1.1 Logging in the Console

The following introduces how to log in the Console.

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console

The following takes the Windows HyperTerminal as an example to introduce how to


log into the Console and access the equipments CLI network management system.

Prerequisites

u The connections with the network management computer and the equipment
are completed via the Console cable.

u The network management computer is turned on normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

u The username and password of the AN5006-20s CLI network management


system are available.

Procedure

1. Click the Start menu on the desktop, and select All ProgramsAccessories
TelecomHyperTerminal to bring up the Connection Description dialog
box.

Note:

The Windows XP operating system is used as an example here.

2. In the Connection Description dialog box, perform the following


configurations:

4 Name: Fill in the name of a connection object, such as FiberHome CLI


Control Terminal.

4 Icon: Select an icon for this connection.

1-2 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Click OK, and the Connect To dialog box appears.

3. Select the COM1 port of the Console interface on the manage control card in
the drop-down list of the Connecting using tab in the Connect To dialog box.

Click OK, and the COM1 Properties dialog box appears.

4. In the COM1 Properties dialog box, click the "Restore Defaults" button directly.
The default configurations are as below:

4 Bits per second: 9600

Version: A/1 1-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4 Data bits: 8

4 Parity: None

4 Stop bits: 1

4 Flow control: None

Click OK, and the Console can be started up.

1-4 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

5. Press the Enter key, and input the username and the password to log into the
CLI network management system. The commands are as follows:
Login:GEPON
// The default user is common user, and the user name is GEPON.
Password:*****
// The initial password is GEPON.
User>enable
// In the common user mode, use the enable command to enter the administrator mode.
Password:*****
// The initial password of administrator account is GEPON.
Admin#
// After the prompt Admin appears, users can type command lines to perform network management
operations on the equipment.

Note:

u If the command prompt is User>, the system is in common user


mode; if the command prompt is Admin#, the system is in
administrator mode.

u The username is case insensitive, while the password should be


capitalized.

Version: A/1 1-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Caution:

To enhance the security of the system, users should memorize their


passwords and keep them secret. Regularly changing passwords is
strongly recommended.

6. Select FileSave from the menu bar of the Console window to save the
configurations for the Console.

1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console

Having set up the Console for the AN5006-20's CLI network management system in
your first login, you can directly access the Console via the CLI network
management system next time.

Prerequisites

u The connections with the network management computer and the equipment
are completed via the Console cable.

u The network management computer is turned on normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

u The Console for the AN5006-20's CLI network management system has been
set up (the following takes the FiberHome CLI Control Terminal as an
example).

Procedure

1. Select StartProgramAccessoriesTelecomHyperTerminal
FiberHome CLI Control Terminal from the desktop to bring up the Telnet
default? alert box.

4 Click Yes to set the hyper terminal to the default Telnet program.

4 Click No and the hyper terminal will not be set to the default Telnet
program.

Access the created Console.

1-6 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Note:

To set up a shortcut for convenience, drag FiberHome CLI Control


Terminal to the desktop.

1.2 Configuring the ANM2000 Management


Channel

The following introduces how to configure the ANM2000 management channel.

1.2.1 Configuration Rule

The following introduces the configuration rules of the management channel and the
management VLAN of the AN5006-20.

u The equipment should use the MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2 or the MCUC to


achieve EPON uplink.

u The equipment can support up to four management VLANs, which manage the
equipment in a complex network environment.

u If the IP address of the ANM2000 client end and the equipment management IP
address are not in the same network segment, you should set the static routing
to perform routing forwarding.

u While configuring the static routing, you need to configure the IP address and
mask of the destination network segment and the gateway address of the next-
hop routing.

u The management VLAN and IP are only valid in the equipment's CPU. Users
need to configure the corresponding uplink service VLAN for the management
port.

u If the tag property of the uplink service VLAN is set to untag, the port default
VLAN should be configured.

u QinQ management VLANs are supported to provide users with double-layer


management channels.

Version: A/1 1-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

1.2.2 Network Diagram

The AN5006-20 can support up to four management VLANs, which manage the
equipment in a complex network environment. The ANM2000 client end manages
the equipment via the uplink port of the equipment.

When the AN5006-20 uses the EPON uplink port, the network diagram of the
ANM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 The ANM2000 Network Diagram

1.2.3 Planning Data

The planning data of configuring the ANM2000 management channel for the
AN5006-20 are shown in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Item Description Example

Slot No. The number of the slot actually used. 14


PON port No. The number of the PON port actually used. 1
The ONU authorization number allocated
Authenticating and ONU No. 1
by the system automatically.
authorizing the ONU
Authentication Configure according to the network Physical identifier
mode planning of the operator. authentication
Physical address The MAC address of the ONU FHTT00240089
Configure according to the network
Service Name data
planning of the operator.
Configuring VLAN The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port
Start VLAN ID 3500
local end service service.
(optional) The ending VLAN ID number of the uplink
End VLAN ID port service. The starting VLAN ID should 3500
not be larger than the ending VLAN ID.

1-8 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Item Description Example

Uplink port
Configure according to the number of the
number or
actually used uplink port or the TRUNK 19:XFP
TRUNK group
group.
number
The Tag processing mode of the uplink
service VLAN, including TAG and UNTAG.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be uplinked in the
TAG/UNTAG TAG
untag form, while the downlink untag
packets will be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the
uplink / downlink data packets will not
be processed when they pass the port.

Service Type Data should be selected for data service. data


Add-slot Mode Includes Auto Add and Manual Add. Auto Add
The slot number of the OLT EPON
Slot No. interface card corresponding to the ONU; 14
read-only.

The PON port number of the OLT EPON


PON port No. interface card corresponding to the ONU; 1
read-only.

The authorization number of the OLT


ONU No. EPON interface card of the ONU; read- 1
only.
Configuring ONU Read-only; allocated by the system
Serial No. -
management VLAN automatically.

Configure according to the network


Management ID 1
planning of the operator.

Management Configure according to the management


manage
VLAN name VLAN name actually used.

When the in-band management method is


used, all the ports should be selected
Port No. because the management can only be All ports
performed via the uplink port of the
AN5006-20.

Version: A/1 1-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Tag property planning of the operator. Select tag or tag
untag.

Management
SVLAN protocol The default setting is 33024. 33024
label
The outer management VLAN value of the
ONU, ranging from 1 to 4085. If only single
Management layer management VLAN is configured,
3500
SVLAN the management SVLAN is used to
configure the single layer management
VLAN value.
The priority of the management outer
Management
VLAN of the ONU The configuration range 7
SVLAN priority
is 0 to 7; 7 is the highest level.

Management
CVLAN protocol The default setting is 33024. -
label
The inner management VLAN value of the
ONU, ranging from 1 to 4085. If only the
Management
single layer management VLAN is -
CVLAN
configured, the management CVLAN is
null.
The priority of the management inner
Management
VLAN of the ONU The configuration range -
CVLAN priority
is 0 to 7; 7 is the highest level.

The IP address of the ONU, configured


IP Address 10.98.30.31
according to the actual used IP address.

Configure according to the network


Mask 255.255.0.0
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Gateway 10.98.1.254
planning of the operator.

Destination The network gateway of the network


10.30.1.254
network address management server
Adding static route The gateway IP address of the segment
Gateway 10.98.1.254
(optional) where the OLT equipment is located

The mask of the network management


Mask 255.255.0.0
server

1-10 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

1.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ANM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

1.2.5 Authenticating and Authorizing an ONU

The following introduces the methods of authenticating the AN5006-20 in the mode
based on physical ID and assigning the authorization numbers automatically by the
system.

For the configuration steps of other authentication and authorization modes, please
refer to AN511606B Optical Line Terminal Equipment EPON Configuration Guide
or AN511606B Optical Line Terminal Equipment GPON Configuration Guide.

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ONU AuthenticationPON Authentication


Mode to access the PON Authentication Mode tab.

Version: A/1 1-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3. In the Authentication mode drop-down list of PON port 1 under slot 14, select
Physic-ID Authentication.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 Configuring the Authentication Mode of the PON Port

5. In the Menu Tree pane, select ONU AuthenticationONU Physic-ID


address Whitelist to access the Physical Address White List Setting
window.

6. Click the Get Unauthorized ONU button on the toolbar to make the Get
Unauthorized ONU dialog box appear.

7. In the Slot No.\PON No. drop-down list, select slot 14 and PON port 1, and
click the button to select the ONU whose PON port number is 1 and physical
address is FHTT00240089, as shown in Figure 1-4.

1-12 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Figure 1-4 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs

8. Click the OK button to return to the Physical Address White List Setting
window.

9. Click the Create on Device button. If the authorization succeeds, the


information as shown in Figure 1-5 will be displayed.

Figure 1-5 ONU Authorized Successfully

1.2.6 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

When the management SVLAN of the ONU and the management VLAN of the OLT
are different, users should configure the local end service VLAN the same with the
management SVLAN of the ONU on the OLT. If the management SVLAN of the
ONU and the management VLAN of the OLT are the same, users can omit this step.
It is recommended that users set the management SVLAN of the ONU the same as
the management VLAN of the OLT.

Version: A/1 1-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select VLAN ConfigLocal VLANLocal End


Service VLAN to access the Local End Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

1.2.7 Configuring ONU Management VLAN

Configure the parameters such as the management VLAN and the IP address of the
AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Click the EPON interface card in Slot 14 of the AN5116-06B in the Object Tree
pane, and the right pane will display the ONU List.

2. Right-click the AN5006-20 whose management VLAN is to be managed, and


select Service Configuration Management from the menu bar.

3. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigurationONU Management VLAN, and


open the ONU Management VLAN tab.

4. Click the Append button in the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add:
dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

1-14 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

6. Click the button in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 1-7.

Figure 1-7 Configuring ONU Management VLAN

1.2.8 Adding the Static Route

When the network management server and the managed ONU are in different
network segments, users need to add the static route.

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the "Service Config Management" window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigStatic Routing.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 1-8.

Figure 1-8 Adding the Static Route

1.2.9 Configuration Result

After the previous steps, the configuration of the ANM2000 management channel
has been completed. Users can manage and maintain the AN5006-20 by logging in
the ANM2000.

Version: A/1 1-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

1.3 Logging into the ANM2000


Prerequisites

u The Informix database has been correctly installed and the related services
have been started.

u The ANM2000 server end has been correctly installed.

u The ANM2000 network management computer has been normally started.

u The configuration of the ANM2000 management channel has been completed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the ANM2000 icon on the desktop to bring up the


ANM2000 User Login dialog box.

2. Enter the user name and the password (they are both 1 by default), and click
the OK button. After the authentication users will access the main GUI of the
ANM2000.

1.4 Description of the Network Management GUI

Users can manage the AN5006-20 efficiently via the ANM2000. The ANM2000 can
monitor and control the equipment in real time, so as to improve the operating
stability.

GUI Layout

As shown in Figure 1-9, the main screen of the ANM2000 consists of main menu,
toolbar, status bar, etc.

1-16 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

(1) Alarm and event report (2) Thumbnail pane (3) Object tree pane
pane

(4) Main menu pane (5) Toolbar (6) Display pane

(7) Status bar

Figure 1-9 The ANM2000 Main Screen

Common Buttons

The service configuration of the AN5006-20 is executed in the ANM2000. The


system provides buttons for configuration operations. See Table 1-2 for common
buttons.

Version: A/1 1-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 1-2 Common Buttons for Configuration GUI

Symbol Title Function


Click the button in the "Detect Physical Configuration"
Detect physical
window after adding the device to synchronize the
configuration
equipment configuration in the ANM2000.

Click the button to add one or more configuration items


Append
in the "Service Config Management" window.

Click the button to create configuration item of the


Create Current Row
current row and make it valid in the "Service Config
To Device
Management" window.

Click the button to create configuration item of the


Create On Device equipment and make it valid in the "Service Config
Management" window.

Click the button to read the configuration or status


information for items in the Admin Tool of the
Read From Device
equipment to the current GUI in the "Service Config
Management" window.

Click the button to save configuration items to


Write To Database database in the "Service Config Management"
window.
Click the button to read the configuration saved in
Read From
database for the items in the Admin Tool to the current
Database
GUI in the "Service Config" Management window.

Click this button to configure the card authorization


Write Device and the port service VLAN on the equipment and
make them valid.
Click this button to read the card authorization and the
Read Device
port service VLAN configuration on the equipment.

Click the button to add one or more configuration items


Add Item number in the "Add Item number" dialog box when the data
service is configured in a batch manner.

Click the button to add one or more service


Configuring Port
configuration items for all ports and PVCs in the "Port
Service VLAN
Service VLAN Config" window.

Click the button to set parameters in a batch manner in


Batch Modify the Batch Modify dialog box for items in Admin Tool in
the Service Config Management window.

1-18 Version: A/1


1 Configuring the ANM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-2 Common Buttons for Configuration GUI (Continued)

Symbol Title Function


Click the button of the "Modify Selected Item" in the
Modify Selected Item "Batch Modify" dialog box to select the designated
configuration item for modifying in a batch manner.

Click the button of the "Modify All Item" in the "Batch


Modify All Item Modify" dialog box to select all configuration items for
modifying in a batch manner.

Version: A/1 1-19


2 Adding Equipment

After logging into the ANM2000, users need to add the to-be-managed AN5006-20
to a management domain so as to manage and maintain it. The following introduces
the operation steps for adding the equipment.

Configuration Rule

Configuration Flow

Adding a Logical Domain

Adding a System

Adding a Module

Adding Cards

Authorizing Cards

Configuring SNMP Trap Receiver Address

Configuring the SNMP Time System

Synchronizing Time

Saving Configuration to Flash

Version: A/1 2-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2.1 Configuration Rule

u If the LAN management mode is selected, the ANM2000 computer can


communicate with the AN5006-20 system normally only if the system IP
address is consistent with that set in the in-band management VLAN. For
example, if the equipment IP address set in the management VLAN is
10.98.20.20, the system IP address should be also set to 10.98.20.20.

u If the ANM2000 computer and equipment are not in the same LAN, users
should manage the equipment using a gateway. In this case, the system IP
address should be in the same segment with the equipment gateway IP
address of the management VLAN. The ANM2000 computer accesses the
AN5006-20 system to manage it via the gateway. For example, if the equipment
gateway IP address of the management VLAN is 10.98.x.x (the subnet mask is
255.255.0.0), the system IP address should be also set to 10.98.x.x (the subnet
mask is 255.255.0.0, which cannot be th same as the gateway IP address).

2.2 Configuration Flow

The flow of adding the equipment is shown in Figure 2-1.

2-2 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-1 Flow of Adding Devices

2.3 Adding a Logical Domain

Divide the management objects by configuring the logical domain according to the
executive function of the operator.

Version: A/1 2-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Configuration Procedure

1. Right-click a blank area of the Object Tree pane and select Add Logic
Domain from the shortcut menu to bring up the Add LogicArea dialog box, as
shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Adding a Logical Domain

2. Configure parameters in the Add LogicArea dialog box. Fill in the domain
description according to your demand.

3. After completing parameter configuration, click Add and the created logic
domain 1 appears in the Object Tree pane, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 The Added Logic Domain

2-4 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

2.4 Adding a System

Add the AN5006-20 in the ANM2000 according to the IP address, subnet mask and
gateway.

Configuration Procedure

1. Right-click the logic domain created in the Object Tree pane, select Add Shelf
DeviceONU/ONTAdd AN5006_20 System from the shortcut menu to
bring up the "Add System" dialog box.

2. Configure parameters in the Add System dialog box as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Adding the AN5006-20 System

3. Click Add and the created system 1 appears in the Object Tree pane, as
shown in Figure 2-5.

Version: A/1 2-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-5 The Added System

2.5 Adding a Module

Add the AN5006-20 module to the ANM2000.

Configuration Procedure

1. Right-click the AN5006-20 system in the Object Tree pane, and select Add
Module from the shortcut menu to bring up the Add Module dialog box.

2. Configure parameters in the Add Module dialog box as shown in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 Adding a Module

2-6 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

3. Click Add and the created module appears in the Object Tree pane, as shown
in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 The Added Module

2.6 Adding Cards

Add the cards required by the equipment and the service operation to the AN5006-
20 system.

2.6.1 Adding Cards Automatically

The cards can be automatically added to the slots via the automatic detection of the
current physical configuration of the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Right-click the AN5006-20 system in the"Object Tree" pane, and select "Detect
Physical Configuration" from the shortcut menu to bring up the "Detect Physical
Configuration" dialog box.

2. Then select the system object to be detected in the "Object Tree" on the left
side of the window.

3. Select SettingAuto Update Objects from the menu bar.

4. Click Detect Physical Configuration, and the progress and the results of the
detection are displayed in the right part of the window, as shown in Figure 2-8.

Version: A/1 2-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-8 Result of Physical Configuration Detection

5. Click the AN5006-20 module in the "Object Tree" pane in the main window to
check whether the cards displayed in the subrack view are consistent with the
results of physical detection; if consistent, the cards are added successfully, as
shown in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9 The Subrack View

2.6.2 Adding Cards Manually

The cards can be added to the subrack view manually one by one.
After adding the AN5006-20 module, click this module in the "Object Tree", and its
subrack view will appear in the right pane, as shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 The Subrack View (No Card Added)

2-8 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

The AN5006-20s cards that can be configured in the subrack view are listed in
Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Configuration of the AN5006-20 Cards

Card Name Applicable Slot Quantity

MCU-EPON / MCU-EPON2 /
5 1
MCUC
POTS 1 to 4 0 to 4
POTS32 1 to 4 0 to 4
AD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
AD64 1 to 4 0 to 4
VD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
CASA 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8A 1 to 4 0 to 4
HD32A 1 to 4 0 to 4
PWRB 6 1
FANB 7 1
HCU-20 801 0 to 1

Add the FANB card in the Slot 7 manually in the subrack view. Below are specific
procedures:

Procedure

1. Right-click the slot to be added with a card and select "Add Board" from the
shortcut menu. Then select the desired card type in the sub-menu that appears
subsequently. See Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Adding Cards Manually

2. In the Add Card dialog box that appears, keep the default values of the card
property parameters, and click the Add, as shown in Figure 2-12.

Version: A/1 2-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-12 Filling in Card Parameters

4 Right-click the card to be modified in the subrack view or the Object Tree
on the left, and select Property from the shortcut menu. Then modify the
card properties in the dialog box that appears.

4 Right-click the card to be deleted in the subrack view or the Object Tree on
the right, and select Delete from the shortcut menu. The card will then be
deleted.

4 Right-click the card to be replaced in the subrack view and select Reset To
from the shortcut menu. Then select the new card type in the sub-menu.
After replacing the card, reconfigure parameters for the new card or use
the system default configurations.

2.7 Authorizing Cards

Authorizing the cards of the AN5006-20 system is essential for further service
configuration.

2-10 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

2.7.1 Authorizing Present Cards

It is necessary to authorize all cards in the subrack at one time if the equipment is in
its first use, and then the card service can be configured.

Procedure

1. Right-click the AN5006-20 system in the Object Tree pane, and selectCard
Config from the shortcut menu to bring up the Set Card Authorization dialog
box.

2. Click Write to Device in the toolbar to authorize all cards which are present, as
shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Setting Card Authorization

2.7.2 Pre-authorizing Non-present Cards

If the cards are not present, it is necessary to pre-authorize cards according to


configuration requirement and deliver the configuration data to the equipment.
When users actually insert the cards, the equipment can check the type and operate
the service configuration as long as the types match.

Procedure

1. Right-click the AN5006-20 system in the Object Tree pane, and selectCard
Config from the shortcut menu to bring up the Set Card Authorization dialog
box.

2. Click the corresponding blank area under the Set Card Authorization item of
Slot 2, and choose the AD64 card in the pull-down list.

Version: A/1 2-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3. Click Write to Device in the toolbar and then click "Yes" in the dialog box that
appears, so as to complete the operations of pre-authorization, as shown in
Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Completing Card Pre-authorization

2.8 Configuring SNMP Trap Receiver Address

Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address, and then the system will send the Trap
message to the address.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandSNMP Trap Server in the Menu Tree pane to bring
up the SNMP Trap Server tab.

3. Click Append on the toolbar. In the Please Input The Rows For Add: dialog
box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add one SNMP TRAP
receiver address.

4. Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address (configure according to the IP


address of the ANM2000 server in use), UDP port number, community name
and SNMP version

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 2-15.

2-12 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-15 Configuring SNMP Trap Receiver Address

2.9 Configuring the SNMP Time System

Configure the SNMP time system, including the interval for time synchronization and
the IP address of the network management system server.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config and CommandTime ManagementTime Management


Config from the Menu Tree pane to select the Snmp System Time Config
tab.

3. Configure the EMS synchronization interval and the IP address of the EMS
server.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16 Configuring the SNMP Time System

Version: A/1 2-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2.10 Synchronizing Time

The system time synchronization aims to synchronize the AN5006-20 with the
ANM2000 server and detect whether the communication between them is smooth.

Note:

After connected to the ANM2000 server, the equipment will apply to the
ANM2000 server for time synchronization. If connected to multiple
ANM2000 servers, the equipment will apply to the first ANM2000 server
connected to it for time synchronization. To choose another ANM2000
server to perform time synchronization for the equipment, users can
reconfigure the SNMP time system.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config and CommandTime Calibration, and
make the Deliver Commands dialog box appear, as shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Synchronizing System Time

2-14 Version: A/1


2 Adding Equipment

3. Click OK to start executing the time synchronization command.

4. After the time synchronization is completed successfully, click the Close


button.

2.11 Saving Configuration to Flash

To prevent loss of equipment configuration data subsequent to power off, it is


recommended for users to save the configuration data into to the flash after they
have completed provisioning all services and configuring equipment functions.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandSave Config To Flash in the Menu Tree pane to


bring up the Sending Commands... dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18 Saving Configuration to Flash

3. Click OK to save the configuration to Flash.

4. After saving the configuration, click the Close button.

Version: A/1 2-15


3 Configuring Voice Services

The following introduces how to configure voice service of the AN5006-20.

Note:

Only the MCUA card supports the PSTN voice service, while the MCUB,
MCUC, MCUD, MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON, and MCU-
GPON2 cards support the NGN voice service.

Common Configuration

Configuring NGN Voice Service Example - H.248

Configuring NGN Voice Service Example - SIP

Common Configuration

MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

SIP Configuration

Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

Version: A/1 3-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.1 Common Configuration

The following introduces the common configuration steps and methods of


provisioning the voice services for the AN5006-20.

3.1.1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

The following introduces these configurations: Configure the service VLAN for the
uplink port, restricts the VLAN ID range of the service passing through the uplink
port of the AN511606B, and processes the VLAN tags.

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select VLAN ConfigLocal VLANLocal End


Service VLAN to access the Local End Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure various parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

3-2 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2 Configuring NGN Voice Service Example -


H.248

The following introduces the VoIP service configuration method using the H.248
protocol with an example.

3.2.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can provision the voice service using the CASA / POTS32 / POTS
card. The following uses the POTS card as an example.

u When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access
terminal, users should configure the MGC protocol type of the VoIP service as
the H.248 protocol, and select the protocol port 2944.

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u When configuring the VoIP voice service VLAN, the service VLAN ID must
range in the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port VLAN ID must range in
the OLT local VLAN IDs.

u The VoIP service supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

u An uplink port cannot join multiple VLANs in the untagged mode.

u The POTS and POTS32 cards support 64 and 32 interfaces respectively.

u The CASA card supports 32 interfaces, whose configuration steps are the
same as those of the POTS card.

u When the IP address configuration mode is static, users only need to configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

u When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name, users
should pay attention to the following aspects: The value 0 cannot be used, and
the value of (end value of the variable part - the start value of the variable part)/
the step of the variable part must be less than 6000.

Version: A/1 3-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

u The configuration items such as the SIP authentication user name, the SIP
authentication password, and the SIP subscriber call configuration profile ID
can be edited only when the SIP protocol is used.

3.2.2 Network Diagram

The network of the voice service in the H.248 mode is shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Network of the H.248 Voice Service

The H.248 protocol separates the signaling and the RTP flow to implement the
voice service of users. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of
the upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.

As shown in Figure 3-2, the AN5006-20 system uses the H.248 protocol to perform
the signaling interaction with the softswitch for controlling the call, and users
Phone1 to Phone64 access the MG (the AN5006-20) via the ports 1 to 64 of the
POTS64 card.

3-4 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

The AN5006-20 uses the standard voice encoding technologies to translate the
user voice signals into 64 RTP flows, and adds the QinQ VLAN whose SVLAN ID is
200 and CVLAN ID is 10 to the signaling flow, as well as adds the QinQ VLAN
whose SVLAN ID is 200 and CVLAN ID is 20 to the RTP flow.The PON uplink mode
is used, meaning that the signals are transmitted to the IP network via the OLT
AN5116-06B, so as to implement access of VoIP services for multiple users based
on the AN5006-20 system.

Version: A/1 3-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.2.3 Planning Data

The POTS card is used as the AN5006-20s interface card at the subscriber side.
The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are compulsory. The
planning data are shown in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Planning Data of the H.248 Voice Service

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Service Name ngn1
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Starting VLAN ID 200
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Ending VLAN ID 200
planning of the operator.
Configure
Configure according to the number of
uplink service
Port No/Trunk Group ID the actually used uplink port or the 19:SFP1
parameters
TRUNK group.

Configure according to the network


TAG/UNTAG UNTAG
planning of the operator.

NGN should be selected for the VoIP


Service Type NGN
service.
Add-slot Mode "Auto Add" or "Manual Add". Auto Add
Configure according to the actual
Slot No. 4
conditions.
Configure according to the actual
Enable POTS Port No. 1 to 64
conditions.
port
Enable should be selected for voice
ENABLEFLAG service configuration. Otherwise, the Enable
service cannot be provisioned.

Service ID Read only 1


The user can enter numbers, letters
Service Name and underlines without exceeding 30 NGN
Configuring characters.
uplink service The starting value of the service VLAN
VLAN ID. The value range: 1 to 4095
Starting VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092). 200
The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

3-6 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data of the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The ending value of the service VLAN


ID. The value range: 1 to 4095
Ending VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092). 200
The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

The port number or the Trunk group


number of the service.
Port number or the trunk
If the uplink port is added to the trunk PON
group ID
group, only the trunk group will be
displayed instead of the uplink port.

Uplink port Tag / Untag untag indicates stripping the tag; tag
tag
property indicates not stripping the tag.

Read-only, including two types:


signaling VLAN and RTP flow VLAN.
Signaling VLAN is the VLAN tag Signaling RTP flow
Voice VLAN Type
carried by the voice signaling flow, VLAN VLAN
and the RTP flow VLAN is the VLAN
tag carried by the voice flow.

Unconfigurable, null by default


Service Name -
currently.

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1


Service Tpid 33024
to 65534. The default setting is 33024.

The SVLAN ID in the QinQ


environment, or the VLAN ID in the
single layer environment. The VLAN
Configuring Svlan Id 200
ID should be within the uplink port
Voice VLAN
VLAN range: 1 to 4085, should not be
null.
The service VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
Svlan Cos 7
highest priority, while 0 is the lowest.
The default value is 7.
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
to 65534. The default setting is 33024.
Cvlan Tpid 33024
Not required when a single VLAN is
configured.

The CVLAN ID under QinQ


Cvlan Id environment. Not required when a 10 20
single VLAN is configured.

Version: A/1 3-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data of the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The user VLAN priority level. The


value ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
Cvlan Cos highest priority, while 0 is the lowest. 7
The default value is 7. Not required
when a single VLAN is configured.

The IP address or domain of the


Master MGC Address 192.168.1.1
master softswitch platform MGC.

The communication port of the master


Master MGC Platform
softswitch platform MGC, ranging from 2944
Port No.
0 to 65535. The default value is 2944.
The IP address or domain of the slave
Slave MGC Address 192.168.2.1
softswitch platform MGC.

The communication port of the slave


Slave MGC Platform
softswitch platform MGC, ranging from 2944
Port No.
0 to 65535. The default value is 2944.
Controls whether the ONU regularly
sends keep-alive messages to the
Configuring
Keep-alive softswitch platform MGC. Options Enable Initiative
Megaco /
available are "Enable Initiative",
MGCP
"Enable Passive" and "Disable".
Softswitch
The period of sending keep-alive
Platform
messages. The value ranges from 1 to
Parameters Alive Interval (s) 30
86400; the unit is second. The default
setting is 30 seconds.

The maximum timeout times that the


softswitch platform MGC permits the
ONU to send the keep-alive
messages; if the value is exceeded, it
Alive Times 3
is considered that the MGC loses its
communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The
default setting is 3.

Users can select Notify or Service


Alive format Notify
Change.

IP Config Mode Supports static. static


The IP address and the subnet mask
Configuring
of the core switch card's CPU. The IP IPv4:192.168.1.101/255.255.
voice IP Signal IP
address is used to communicate with 255.0
the MGC.

3-8 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data of the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The signaling gateway address, used


Signal Gateway IPv4:192.168.1.254
to forward the data to MGC.
The IP address and the subnet mask IPv4:192.168.2.101/255.255.
RTP IP Address
of the core switch card's DSP. 255.0
The RTP gateway address. The
RTP Gateway gateway is used to forward RTP IPv4:192.168.2.254
stream communicating with other MG.

The IP address of the master domain


name system. Only when the MGC is
configured as a domain is the DNS
Primary DNS configuration required. In this example -
the MGC is configured as an IP
address, the DNS configuration is thus
not required.

The IP address of the slave domain


name system. Only when the MGC is
configured as a domain is the DNS
Second DNS configuration required. In this example -
the MGC is configured as an IP
address, the DNS configuration is thus
not required.

The domain name of the gateway.


Configure according to the actual
conditions. If the softswitch platform
requires registration in terms of
domain name, the user should apply
Domain Name -
for a domain name for the equipment
from the softswitch center. When the
Configuring
default value (null) is used, the domain
Voice Basic
name is Voice Signaling IP: Local
Parameters
Protocol Port No..
The communication port of the
Local Protocol Port No. softswitch platform MGC, ranging from 2944
0 to 65534. The default value is 0.
Select compressed code or
Protocol Encode Type uncompressed text code. The default Uncompressed encoding
setting is compressed text code.

Version: A/1 3-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data of the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select TCP or UDP as the


Transport Protocol Type transmission layer protocol. UDP is UDP
selected by default.

The fixed part of the RTP resource


name. If the RTP resource name is
Fixed part of RTP name RTP/
RTP/1000, the fixed part should be
RTP/. The default value is RTP/.
The start value of the variable part of
the RTP resource name; the start
Start value of RTP
value must be smaller than the end 4000
name's variable part
value. The value ranges from 0 to
65534, and the default value is 4000.
The end value of the variable part of
Configure the the RTP resource name; the end
End value of RTP
RTP resource value must be larger than the start 9000
name's variable part
profile value. The value ranges from 0 to
65534, and the default value is 9000.
The step of the RTP name's variable
Step of RTP name's
part. The value ranges from 1 to 1
variable part
65534, and the default value is 1.
Choose whether to pad the bits
following the fixed part (RTP/) with
zeros automatically to fill the tetrad, for
Whether to fill RTP name Fill
example, to pad RTP/0 to RTP/0000.
Configure according to the actual
condition. Default setting: Fill.

The actual slot number of the POTS


Slot No. 4
card.
The actual port number of the POTS
Port No. card connected with the subscriber's 1 to 64
telephone.
Configuring
The corresponding Termination ID of
voice port
PHONE the port, used to identify the physical B1 to B64
termination point.

Configure which DSP profile to be


DSP profile name bound with the port. The default value Default
is Default.

3-10 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 3-3 for provisioning the voice service using the H.248 protocol.

Figure 3-3 Flow of H.248 Voice Services

3.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

Version: A/1 3-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.2.6 Enabling the POTS port

It is necessary to enable all the ports of the POTS card to be used to start up the
voice service. The following takes the POTS64 card as an example.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of ENABLEFLAG in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select Enable in the list box of Start Value, type 0 in the Plus Value input box,
and type 64 in Repeat Times input box. Keep the default values for other input
boxes. Click the Modify Selected Item in the toolbar, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Modifying Port Enabling in a Batch Manner

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-5.

3-12 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-5 Completion of Enabling POTS Port

3.2.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Processes the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services in the
range of the VLAN ID are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port
according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service VLAN to access the Uplink Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Version: A/1 3-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.2.8 Configuring Voice VLAN

Configure the related parameters of the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the signaling service and the VLAN of RTP flow respectively.

Users need only configure the service VLAN but not the user VLAN if the network is
in single-VLAN mode. Users should configure both the service VLAN and the user
VLAN according to the network planning if the network is in QinQ mode.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoip Service VLAN to bring up the Voip Service VLAN
tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Configuring Voice VLAN

3.2.9 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform


Parameters

Configure the IP address of the MGC and the protocol port number of the NGN.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

3-14 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


MEGACO/MGCP ConfigMegaco/MGCP SoftSwitch Config to bring up the
Megaco/MGCP SoftSwitch Config.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters

3.2.10 Configuring IP Addresses of the Voice Service

Configure the related parameters of the voice service IP, and the ONU processes
the voice flow and the signaling flow using the CPU module and DSP module
respectively.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoice IP Config to bring up the Voice IP Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Configuring Voice IP

Version: A/1 3-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.2.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure the related parameters of the communication between MG and MGC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoice Base Config to bring up the Voice Base Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3.2.12 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

Configure the parameters relating to the RTP resource profile to set the value in the
RTP flow packet head in the H.248 protocol.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


MEGACO/MGCP ConfigMegaco RTP Config Profile to bring up the
Megaco RTP Config Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-11.

3-16 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-11 Configuring RTP Resource Profile

3.2.13 Configuring Voice Port

Configure the related parameters of the voice port for the communication between
the MG voice port and the MGC or other MGs.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandVoice Port Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring
up the Voice Port Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Configuring Voice Port

Version: A/1 3-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.2.14 Configuration Result

After the configuration is completed, the AN5006-20 will start up the voice service
based on the H.248 protocol.

u The calling party can hear the dial tone when going off-hook.

u When the calling party dials the number of the called party, the called party can
normally ring, and the calling party can hear the ring back tone.

u The calling party and the called party can have normal calls.

u The caller can hear the busy tone after the called party hooks on.

3.2.15 Checking Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the current ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Get InformationVoice StatusVoice Device


Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Checking Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering.

u register successful.

3-18 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.

3.2.16 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Click the active management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Get InformationVoice StatusVoice IP


Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service

3.2.17 Checking DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupation
condition. One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot
when the user port is busy.

Version: A/1 3-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Get InformationVoice StatusDSP


Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Checking DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is communicating.

u Idle: no endpoint users name is configured or the user is not communicating


normally.

3.2.18 Checking NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Get InformationNGN User Port Status in the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

3-20 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

Version: A/1 3-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.3 Configuring NGN Voice Service Example -


SIP

The following introduces the VoIP service configuration method using the SIP
protocol with an example.

3.3.1 Configuration Rule

u When the softswitch platform uses the SIP protocol to control the access
terminal, select the protocol port 5060.

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u When configuring the VoIP voice service VLAN, the service VLAN ID must
range in the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port VLAN ID must range in
the OLT local VLAN IDs.

u The VoIP service supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

u An uplink port cannot join multiple VLANs in the untagged mode.

u The POTS64 and POTS32 cards supports 64 and 32 interfaces respectively.

u The CASA card supports 32 interfaces, whose configuration steps are the
same as those of the POTS card.

u When the IP address configuration mode is static, users only need to configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

u When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name, users
should pay attention to the following aspects: The value 0 cannot be used, and
the value of (end value of the variable part - the start value of the variable part)/
the step of the variable part must be less than 6000.

u The configuration items such as the SIP authentication user name, the SIP
authentication password, and the SIP subscriber call configuration profile ID
can be edited only when the SIP protocol is used.

u Users should configure the SIP digitmap according to the actual conditions, so
as to implement the rapid match of the telephone number.

3-22 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.2 Network Diagram

The network of the voice service in the SIP mode is shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Network of the SIP Voice Service

The SIP protocol uses the separation mode for the signaling and RTP flow to
implement the voice service of users. The signaling communicates with the
softswitch platform of the upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the
designated MG via the media server.

As shown in Figure 3-17, Phone1 to Phone64 access the MG (the AN5006-20) via
ports 1 to 64 of the POTS64 card, and the AN5006-20 uses the standard voice
encoding technologies to translate the user voice signals into 64 RTP flows, and
adds the QinQ VLAN whose SVLAN ID is 600 and CVLAN ID is 60 to the signaling
flow, as well as adds the QinQ VLAN whose SVLAN ID is 600 and CVLAN ID is 70
to the RTP flow.The PON uplink mode is used, meaning that the signals are
transmitted to the IP network via the OLT AN5116-06B, so as to implement access
of VoIP services for multiple users based on the AN5006-20 system.

Version: A/1 3-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.3.3 Planning Data

The POTS card is used as the interface card of the AN5006-20 at the subscriber
side. The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Service Name ngn1
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Starting VLAN ID 200
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Ending VLAN ID 300
planning of the operator.
Configuring
Configure according to the number of
uplink service
Port No/Trunk Group ID the actually used uplink port or the 19:SFP1
parameters
TRUNK group.

Configure according to the network


TAG/UNTAG UNTAG
planning of the operator.

NGN should be selected for the VoIP


Service Type NGN
service.
Add-slot Mode Auto Add or Manual Add Auto Add
Configure according to the actual
Slot No. 4
conditions.
Configure according to the actual
Enable POTS Port No. 1 to 64
conditions.
port
Enable should be selected for voice
ENABLEFLAG service configuration. Otherwise, the Enable
service cannot be provisioned.

Service ID Read only 1


The user can enter numbers, letters
Service Name and underlines without exceeding 30 NGN
Configuring characters.
uplink service The starting value of the service
VLAN VLAN ID. The value range: 1 to 4095
Starting VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092). 600
The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

3-24 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The ending value of the service


VLAN ID. The value range: 1 to 4095
Ending VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092). 600
The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

The port number or the Trunk group


number of the service.
Port number or the trunk
If the uplink port is added to the trunk GE1
group ID
group, only the trunk group will be
displayed instead of the uplink port.

untag indicates stripping the tag; tag


Port Tag/Untag tag
indicates not stripping the tag.

Read-only, including two types:


signaling VLAN and RTP flow VLAN.
Signaling VLAN is the vlan tag Signaling RTP flow
Voice VLAN Type
carried by the voice signaling flow, VLAN VLAN
and the RTP flow VLAN is the vlan
tag carried by the voice flow.

Unconfigurable, null by default


Service Name -
currently.

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1


Service Tpid 33024
to 65534. The default setting is 33024.

The SVLAN ID in the QinQ


environment, or the VLAN ID in the
single layer environment. The VLAN
Configuring Svlan Id 600
ID should be within the uplink port
Voice VLAN
VLAN range: 1 to 4095, should not be
null.
The service VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
Svlan Cos 7
highest priority, while 0 is the lowest.
The default value is 7.
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
to 65534. The default setting is 33024.
Cvlan Tpid 33024
Not required when a single VLAN is
configured.

The CVLAN ID under QinQ


Cvlan Id environment. Not required when a 60 70
single VLAN is configured.

Version: A/1 3-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The user VLAN priority level. The


value ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
Cvlan Cos highest priority, while 0 is the lowest. 7
The default value is 7. Not required
when a single VLAN is configured.

The IP address or the domain


SipProxyServAddr address of the active SIP proxy 192.168.5.101
server
The port number of the active SIP
SipProxyPort 5060
proxy server; 5060 by default.

The IP address or domain address of


BackupSipProxySer- the standby SIP proxy server;
192.168.6.101
vAddr configured according to the planning
data.
The port number of the standby SIP
BackupSipProxyPort 5060
proxy server; 5060 by default.

The IP address or the domain


SipRegisterAddr address of the active SIP registrar 192.168.5.101
server
The port number of the active SIP
SipRegisterPort 5060
Configuring registrar server; 5060 by default.
SIP server
The IP address or the domain
BackupSipRegisterAddr address of the standby SIP registrar 192.168.6.101
server
The port number of the standby SIP
BackupSipRegisterPort 5060
registrar server; 5060 by default.

After registering the SIP server, the


ONU should send the register
message to the SIP server
periodically. In other words, during
the register refresh period, ONU
Sip Register Interval needs to send the register information 3600
to the SIP server to maintain the
register validity.
The value range is 60 to 3600; the
unit is second; and the default value
is 3600 seconds.

3-26 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Controls whether the ONU regularly


sends keep-alive messages to the
Keep-alive softswitch platform MGC. Options Enable Initiative
available are "Enable Initiative",
"Enable Passive" and "Disable".
The period of sending keep-alive
messages. The value ranges from 1
Alive Interval (s) 30
to 43200; the unit is second. The
default setting is 30 seconds.

The maximum timeout times that the


softswitch platform MGC permits the
ONU to send the keep-alive
messages; if the value is exceeded, it
Alive Times 3
is considered that the MGC loses its
communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The
default setting is 3.

Alive mode Includes By Device and By Port. By Device

IP Config Mode Supports static. static


The IP address and the subnet mask
of the core switch card's CPU. The IP
Signal IP IPv4:192.168.1.101
address is used to communicate with
the MGC.
The subnet mask of the core switch
Signal Mask 255.255.255.0
card's CPU
The signaling gateway address, used
Configuring Signal Gateway IPv4:192.168.1.254
to forward the data to MGC
voice IP
The IP address of the core switch
RTP IP Address IPv4:192.168.2.101
card's DSP
The subnet mask of the core switch
RTP Mask 255.255.255.0
card's DSP
The RTP gateway address. The
gateway is used to forward RTP
RTP Gateway IPv4:192.168.2.254
stream communicating with other
media gateways.

Version: A/1 3-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The domain name of the gateway.


Configure according to the actual
conditions. If the Softswitch platform
requires registration in terms of
domain name, the user should apply
Primary DNS -
for a domain name for the equipment
from the Softswitch center. When the
default value (null) is used, the
domain name is Voice Signaling IP:
Local Protocol Port No..
The IP address of the slave domain
name system. Only when the MGC is
configured as a domain is the DNS
Second DNS configuration required. In this -
example the MGC is configured as an
IP address, the DNS configuration is
thus not required.

The domain name of the gateway.


The default setting is null; configured
according to actual conditions. If the
Softswitch platform requires
Domain Name -
registration in terms of domain name,
the user should apply for a domain
name for the equipment from the
Softswitch center.
Configuring
The communication port of the
voice basic
Softswitch platform MGC, ranging
parameters Local Protocol Port No. 5060
from 0 to 65534. The default value is
0.
Select compressed code or
Protocol Encode Type uncompressed text code. The default Uncompressed encoding
setting is compressed text code.

Select TCP or UDP as the


Transport Protocol Type transmission layer protocol. UDP is UDP
selected by default.

3-28 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data of the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The digit map is mainly used by the


MG to determine whether the dialing
is completed. The SIP protocol does
not define the digit map, therefore
SIP digitmap SIP digitmap most terminals report the number with [0-9ABCD].|[EF][0-9ABCDEF].
a "#". Configure the digit map and the
"#" can be omitted.
Configure this item according to the
actual project requirement.

The actual slot number of the POTS


Slot No. 4
card.
The actual port number of the POTS
Port No. card connected with the subscriber's 1 to 64
telephone.

The actual phone number of a port on


PHONE 88881101 to 88881164
the ONU. The value should be sole.
The name of the DSP profile bound
DSP profile name with the PHONE. The default value is Default
Default.
The username of one ONU port that
Configuring has been authenticated by the SIP
voice port SIPUSER register server. No configuration is 88881101 to 88881164
required for this item if the protocol
type is H.248 or MGCP.

The password of one ONU port that


has been authenticated by the SIP
SIPPASSWD register server. No configuration is test
required for this item if the protocol
type is H.248 or MGCP.

Some functions of the ONU will be


enabled or disabled based on the
SIP User Call Profile ID Default
profile after the ONU is bound to the
profile.

3.3.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 3-18 for provisioning the voice service using the SIP protocol.

Version: A/1 3-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-18 Flow of SIP Voice Services

3.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

3-30 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.6 Enabling the POTS port

It is necessary to enable all the ports of the POTS card to be used to start up the
voice service. The following takes the POTS64 card as an example.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of ENABLEFLAG in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select Enable in the list box of Start Value, type 0 in the Plus Value input box,
and type 64 in Repeat Times input box. Keep the default values for other input
boxes. Click the Modify Selected Item in the toolbar, as shown in Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19 Modifying Port Enabling in a Batch Manner

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-20.

Version: A/1 3-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-20 Completion of Enabling POTS Port

3.3.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Processes the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services in the
range of the VLAN ID are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port
according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service VLAN to access the Uplink Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-21 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

3-32 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.8 Configuring Voice VLAN

Configure the related parameters of the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the signaling service and the VLAN of RTP flow respectively.

u Users need only configure the service VLAN but not the user VLAN if the
network is in single-VLAN mode.

u Users should configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN according to
the network planning if the network is in QinQ mode.

The following introduces the procedure of configuring the voice VLAN (QinQ VLAN
as an example).

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoip Service VLAN to bring up the Voip Service VLAN
tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Configuring Voice VLAN

3.3.9 Configuring the SIP Server

Configure the related parameters of the SIP server. The SIP server includes the
register server and proxy server.

Version: A/1 3-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

u As a network logical entity, the proxy server can represent client end to transmit
or respond requests, and also can act as the client end and the server. Its main
functions include routing, calling control, service providing, AAA (Authentication,
Authorization and Accounting (AAA)), and so on.

u The register server accepts the ONU register request, and then save and
process the relevant information of the ONU register.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


SIP ConfigSIP Server Config to bring up the SIP Server Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Configuring SIP Server

3.3.10 Configuring IP Addresses of the Voice Service

Configure the related parameters of the voice service IP, and the ONU processes
the voice flow and the signaling flow using the CPU module and DSP module
respectively.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

3-34 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoice IP Config to bring up the Voice IP Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Configuring Voice IP

3.3.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure the related parameters of the communication between MG and MGC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoice Base Config to bring up the Voice Base Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Version: A/1 3-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.3.12 Configuring SIP Digitmap

The digitmap is mainly used by the MG to determine whether all dial-ups have been
collected. The SIP protocol does not define the digitmap, and most of the terminals
use the method of dialing # first and then reporting the number. The configuration of
the digitmap can omit the step of dialing #.

After configuring the digitmap of the SIP protocol, when the user dials, the number
should match the dialing scheme in the digitmap and then be reported to the
softswitch platform only when a match is found. The SIP digitmap function is
optional according to the operator's requirement.

Note:

Users should configure the SIP digitmap according to the actual


conditions, so as to implement the rapid match of the telephone number.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


SIP ConfigSIP digitmap to bring up the SIP digitmap tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Configuring SIP Digitmap

3-36 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.13 Configuring Voice Port

Configure the related parameters of the voice port for the communication between
the MG voice port and the MGC or other MGs.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandVoice Port Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring
up the Voice Port Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Configuring Voice Port

3.3.14 Configuration Result

After the configuration is completed, the AN5006-20 will start up the voice service
based on the SIP protocol.

u The calling party can hear the dial tone when going off-hook.

u When the calling party dials the number of the called party, the called party can
normally ring, and the calling party can hear the ring back tone.

Version: A/1 3-37


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

u The calling party and the called party can have normal calls.

u The caller can hear the busy tone after the called party hooks on.

3.3.15 Checking Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Get InformationVoice StatusVoice Device


Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 Checking Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.

3.3.16 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the ONU.

3-38 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Get InformationVoice StatusVoice IP


Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-29.

Figure 3-29 Viewing the Status of the IP Voice Service

3.3.17 Checking DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupation
condition. One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot
when the user port is busy.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Get InformationVoice StatusDSP


Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-30.

Version: A/1 3-39


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-30 Checking DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is communicating.

u Idle: no endpoint users name is configured or the user is not communicating


normally.

3.3.18 Checking NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Get InformationNGN User Port Status in the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-31.

3-40 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-31 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

3.4 Common Configuration

The following introduces common configuration items of the voice service.

Version: A/1 3-41


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Configure the related parameters of the POTS card, mainly include user dialing,
accounting, off-hook / onhook and voice parameters. The pulse duration should be
set less than the FLASH duration.

Note:

The following introduces the access method for configuring the POTS
common parameters in the ANM2000, applicable for the MCUB, MCUC,
MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and MCU-GPON2 cards. The
access method to configure the POTS common parameters of the MCUA
card is described as follows.
1. Click the MCUA card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPOTS Common Parameter in the


Menu Tree pane and access the POTS Common Parameter tab.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigPOTS Common Parameter to bring up the POTS
Common Parameter tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-32.

3-42 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-32 Configuring POTS Common Parameter

3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer

Set the related parameters of the digitmap to control the report time of the number
subscribers dials. The start timer is only applicable to the H.248 protocol, while the
maximum wait time, long timer, short timer and digitmap notify are applicable to the
H.248 and SIP protocols.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigVoice Timer to bring up the Voice Timer tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 Configuring the Voice Timer

3.4.3 Configuring DSP Profile

Configure the related parameters of the DSP voice code to set the voice coding
mode, voice quality, sound, DTMF, and so on. The Default profile profile cannot be
modified or deleted.

Version: A/1 3-43


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigDSP Configuration Profile to bring up the DSP
Configuration Profile tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Configuring DSP Profile

3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters

Configure the related parameters of fax, including the mode, coding mode, fax
report function and packet transmission / receiving time interval used by fax. The
"VBD Enable" can be configured only if the fax mode is set to "T30 Transparent".

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigFax Parameter to bring up the Fax Parameter tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-35.

3-44 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-35 Configuring Fax Parameters

3.4.5 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Configure the related parameters of the POTS card, mainly include user dialing,
accounting, off-hook / onhook and voice parameters. The pulse duration should be
set less than the FLASH duration.

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigPOTS Common Parameter to bring up the POTS
Common Parameter tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Version: A/1 3-45


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.4.6 Configuring POS Telephone Number

The following introduces how to configure the POS service telephone number. The
POS number is provided by UnionPay Center. The equipment identifies the POS
services using the POS telephone number and optimizes the POS telephone
number.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigPOS Phone Number to bring up the POS Phone Number
tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a POS
telephone number.

4. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the UnionPay


Center.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 Configuring POS Telephone Number

3.4.7 Configuring IPT Number

The following introduces how to configuring IPT number. The prefix of the IPT
number is provided by the IPT platform. The equipment identifies the IPT service
using the IPT number and optimizes the IPT number.

3-46 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigIPT Phone Number to bring up the IPT Phone Number
tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add an IPT
number.

4. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the IPT platform.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Configuring IPT Number

3.4.8 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

This command is used to configure the timeout duration of different signal tones
after users pick up the telephone.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common ConfigSignal Tone Timer Config to bring up the Signal Tone
Timer Config tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

Version: A/1 3-47


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

3.4.9 2833 Configuration

2833 is the RTP payload format used by the DTMF digital signal, phone tone and
phone signal. This function is used if no related parameters of the 2833 signaling
negotiation exist.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


Common Config2833 Config to bring up the 2833 Config tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40 Configure 2833

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

The following introduces the MEGACO / MGCP configuration items of voice service.

3-48 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

Configure the MD5 authentication of the voice service for the authentication
between the MG and MGC. The MD5 authentication is applicable to the H.248
protocol only.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


MEGACO/MGCP ConfigVoice MD5 Authentication to bring up the Voice
MD5 Authentication tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data of the project.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing


Parameters

Users can configure this parameter to ensure the consistency of the softswitch
platform status and the ONU equipment side status after the howler tome times out.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

Version: A/1 3-49


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


MEGACO/MGCP ConfigOff Hook Warning Tone Timeout to bring up the
Off Hook Warning Tone Timeout tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters

3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

Configure the caller ID display mode for users. The caller ID display modes include
two systems: FSK and DTMF.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


MEGACO/MGCP ConfigCaller ID Mode to bring up the Caller ID Mode tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

3-50 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.6 SIP Configuration

The following introduces the methods and procedure of the SIP advanced
configuration and the SIP user call profile configuration.

3.6.1 SIP Advanced Configuration

This configuration is used for the intercommunication of the softswitch platform, and
is applicable to the softswitch platforms offered by different manufacturers. It is
advisable to use the default configuration.

In the configuration of user call configuration profile, if the three-party calling


function is disabled, the Call CW/CONF Mode parameter in the SIP advanced
configuration is invalid.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


SIP ConfigSIP Advanced Config to bring up the SIP Advanced Config tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 SIP Advanced Configuration Diagram

Version: A/1 3-51


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

Some of the ONU voice functions will be enabled or disabled according to the profile.
The ONU port takes effect according to the profile after being bound to the profile. It
is advisable to use the default configuration.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandVoice Service Config


SIP ConfigSIP User Call Config Profile to bring up the SIP User Call
Config Profile tab.

3. Configure according to the default values.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-45 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Register or unregister the connected MGC to the AN5006-20. When the connected
MGC is unregistered, the AN5006-20 will disconnect with the current MGC and
automatically connect with the standby MGC, applicable to H.248 protocol.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Control CommandVoice CommandMGC


Register/Unregister to access the MGC Register/Unregister tab.

3-52 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Set the register/unregister status to Register, and the MGC IP address to


192.168.1.1.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-46.

Figure 3-46 Diagram of Registering / Unregistering the MGC

3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Configure the user port of the POTS card to register or unregister to the MGC.
Users can no longer use the port once the port is unregistered.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Control Command NGN User Register/
Unregister to access the NGN User Register/Unregister tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

4. Set the port number to 1, and register/unregister status to Register.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Diagram of Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Version: A/1 3-53


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

The following introduces the methods and procedure of viewing the voice statistics
information.

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

The following introduces how to view the signaling packet statistics information
between the AN5006-20 and the softswitch platform MGC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Get InformationVoice InformationSignaling Packets Statistics


Information in the Menu Tree to bring up the Signaling Packets Statistics
Information tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the RTP data flow statistics information
transmitted and received by the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

3-54 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select Get InformationVoice InformationCall Statistics Information in


the Menu Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

3. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream


Port

The following introduces how to view the RTP data stream statistics information of
the POTS port on the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Get InformationVoice InformationRTP Stream Port Statistics


Information in the Menu Tree to bring up the RTP Stream Port Statistics
Information tab.

3. Click the Set Condition Object button on the Config Object pane at the left
side and select the POTS card to be viewed. Then click OK.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-50.

Version: A/1 3-55


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-50 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port

3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the call statistics information of the POTS port
on the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Get InformationVoice InformationPort Call Statistics


Information in the Menu Tree to bring up the Port Call Statistics Information
tab.

3. Click the Set Condition Object button on the Config Object pane at the left
side and select the POTS card to be viewed. Then click OK.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-51.

3-56 Version: A/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-51 Viewing the Call Statistics Information of Port

Version: A/1 3-57


4 Configuring Data Services

The following introduces how to configure data service of the AN5006-20.

Common Configuration

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent Mode

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode

Example of Configuring VDSL Data Services in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Example of Configuring VDSL Data Services in the N:1 Translation Mode

Version: A/1 4-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.1 Common Configuration

The following introduces the common configuration steps and methods of


provisioning the data services for the AN5006-20.

4.1.1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

The following introduces these configurations: Configures the service VLAN for the
uplink port, restricts the VLAN ID range of the service passing through the uplink
port of the AN511606B, and processes the VLAN tags.

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select VLAN ConfigLocal VLANLocal End


Service VLAN to access the Local End Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the local end service VLAN according to the planning data of the
corresponding data service.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

4-2 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services


in the Transparent Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of ADSL data service in the
transparent mode.

4.2.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card to provision the data
service in the transparent mode. In the following paragraphs the AD64 card is used
as an example.

u If the equipment only needs the single VLAN, user should not enable the QinQ
function and set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured CVLAN. If the
equipment needs the QinQ VLAN, users should enable the QinQ function and
set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured SVLAN.

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID
added into the data service should be within this range.

u The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports, and the CASA card provides 32
ADSL user ports. One ADSL port corresponds to eight PVC channels. One
PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one ADSL port
can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the subscriber
services are shared among the PVCs.

u The AN5006-20 supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example, we use the transparent mode.

u When users use the AD64 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frame uplinked from the subscriber end is added with the CVLAN Tag via the
users intelligent exchange or a home gateway. And then the Ethernet frame is
transmitted by the AN5006-20 and is uplinked to the OLT after being added with
the SVLAN Tag.

u The user-configured COS value is invalid in the transparent mode, and the
system uses the COS value of the tag in the original messages by default.

Version: A/1 4-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.2.2 Network Diagram

Figure 4-2 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent Mode

The two PCs are connected to one of the 64 ports on the AD64 card provided by the
AN5006-20 via a home gateway using the ADSL. The home gateway adds a
CVLAN Tag (ranging from 100 to 163) to the service from each PC. The AN5006-20
then sends the Ethernet frames from the 64 subscribers transparently and adds an
SVLAN Tag 1000, and then sends the services to the providers network. In the
downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

4.2.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card is used as the interface card of the AN5006-20 at the subscriber
side. The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Service Name data
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Start VLAN ID 1000
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Configure uplink service End VLAN ID 3000
planning of the operator.
parameters
Configure according to the number of
Uplink port number or
the actually used uplink port or the 19:SFP1
TRUNK group number
TRUNK group.

Configure according to the network


TAG/UNTAG TAG
planning of the operator.

4-4 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Data should be selected for data


Service Type data
service.
Two modes: Auto Add and Manual
Add-slot Mode Auto Add
Add.
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The
Service Name data1
maximum length of the service name
is 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink
port service. The value range is 1 to
Starting VLAN ID 4085. The starting VLAN ID should 1000
not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
The ending VLAN ID number of the
uplink port service. The value ranges
Ending VLAN ID from 1 to 4085. The starting VLAN ID 1000
should not be larger than the ending
VLAN ID.
Port number or the The port number of the uplink service
PON
Configuring uplink service trunk group ID VLAN or the Trunk group number.
VLAN Set the VLAN tag attribute of the
uplink service. The attribute includes
untag or tag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when they
pass the port and the packets
will be uplinked in the untag form,
Port Tag/Untag tag
while the downlink untag
packets will be added with
designated tags when they pass
the port.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the
uplink / downlink data packets
will not be processed when they
pass the port.

Configuring an ADSL Line Configure according to the network


Profile Name adsl
Profile planning of the operator.

Version: A/1 4-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


operators network planning; the Adsl2+ Adsl2 G.dmt
Transmission Mode
default setting is Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt ReAdsl2
ReAdsl2.
Uplink channel rate mode; fixed,
Up Rate Mode adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime. adaptAtStart
The default mode is adaptAtStart.

The downlink channel rate, including


three modes: fixed, adaptAtStart, and
Down Rate Mode adaptAtRuntime. The default value is adaptAtStart
adaptAtStart. The default mode is
adaptAtStart.

Five types: NoChannel, Fast,


Line Type interleave, FastOrInterleave, and interleave
FastAndInterleave.
The value range is 0 to 100000; the
Min Rate Down unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 0
0kbit/s.
The value range is 0 to 100000; the
Min Rate Up unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 0
0kbit/s.
SNRMDn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
SNRMUp (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit is
Max SNRMDn (dB) 31
dB; and the default value is 31dB.
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit is
Max SNRMUp (dB) 31
dB; and the default value is 31dB.
Min. Signal-to-Noise
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit is
Ratio Margin Down 0
dB; and the default value is 0dB.
(dB)

Min. Signal-to-Noise The value range is 0 to 31; the unit is


0
Ratio Margin Up (dB) dB; and the default value is 0dB.
MaxInterleaveDe- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is
16
layDn (ms) ms; and the default value is 16ms.
MaxInterleaveDelay- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is
16
Up (ms) ms; and the default value is 16ms.

4-6 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to 16


MinINPDn Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


MinINPUp Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

Enables or disables the downlink bit


BitSwapDn swap function. The default value is Disable
Disable.
Enables or disables the uplink bit
BitSwapUp swap function. The default value is Disable
Disable.
Four power modes: L0Mode,
Power Mode L2Mode, L3Mode, L2AndL3Mode. L0Mode
The default mode is L0Mode.
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
PmL0Time (s) unit is second; and the default value 300
is 300 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
PmL2Time (s) unit is second; and the default value 30
is 30 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 15; the unit is
PmL2Atprt (dB) 3
dB; and the default value is 3dB.
The value range is 0 to 1024; the unit
PmL2Rate (kbps) is kbit/s; and the default value is 32
32kbit/s.
Sets the ToneBlackout band. The
ToneBlackoutSet -
default is empty.

The slot number of the AD64 card in


Slot No. 3
actual use.
Binding an ADSL Port to
The port number of the AD64 card in
the ADSL Line Profile Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
ADSL Line Profile The configured ADSL line profile. adsl
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The
Configuring Port Rate
Profile Name maximum length of the profile name PORTRATE.PRF0
Limiting Profile
is 20 characters. The default profile
name is NULL.

Version: A/1 4-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the uplink


Uplink Policing status Policing status function. The default Enable
value is Disable.
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
Uplink Port CIR
the unit is kbit/s; and the default 512
(Kbit/s)
value is 64kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to
US CBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294. The unit is Byte.

The value range is from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 2000
4294967294. The unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing status Policing status function. The default Enable
value is Disable.
DS Policing CIR The value range is from 64 to
8000
(Kbit/s) 1000000. The unit is kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215. The unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the AD64 card in
Slot No. 3
actual use.
Binding an ADSL Port to The port number of the AD64 card in
Port No. 1 to 64
the Rate Limiting Profile actual use.
Select the configured rate limiting
Profile ID PORTRATE.PRF0
profile.

Configure according to the network


planning of the operator. The
Profile Name DEFPVC.PRFO
maximum length is 20 characters.
The default value is DEFPVC.PRFO.
The PVC index number. The value
Configuring a PVC Profile PVC index 0
range is from 0 to 7.

The value ranges from 0 to 255, and


Virtual path identifier 8
the default value is 8.
Virtual channel The value range is 0, 32 to 65535,
35
identifier and the default value is 35.
The slot number of the AD64 card in
Slot No. 3
actual use.
Binding an ADSL Port to
The port number of the AD64 card in
the PVC Profile Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
PVC Profile ID Select the configured PVC profile. defaultPvcPrf

4-8 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the AD64 card in


Slot No. 3
actual use.
The port number of the AD64 card in
Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The value
PVC index 0
range is from 0 to 7.

Configures the service type; includes


Service Type unicast and multicast. The data unicast
service is unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode Transparent
transparent mode and the translation
mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


When rules are required, this
CVlan Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- NULL
defined rule; when rules are not
Configuring a Port Service required, set this parameter to null.
VLAN
CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
CVLAN ID 100 to 163
4085.
The CVLAN priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
CVLAN priority 0
highest priority while 0 is the lowest
priority.

The stacked VLANs, configured


QinQ Enable according to the operators network Enable
planning. Select Enable or Disable.

The QinQ rules for binding services.


This parameter is the name of the
QinQ Rule ID NULL
user-defined rule. When rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
QINQ VLAN ID 1000
4085.

Version: A/1 4-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in The Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The SVLAN priority level. The value


ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
QINQ priority 0
highest priority while 0 is the lowest
priority.

The slot number of the AD64 card in


Slot No. 3
actual use.
The port number of the AD64 card in
Enabling the ADSL Port Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
Enables or disables the ADSL port.
ENABLEFLAG Enable
Disabled by default.

The slot number of the AD64 card in


Slot No. 3
actual use.
The port number of the AD64 card in
Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
Enabling the Port PVC
The PVC index number. The value
PVC index 0
range is from 0 to 7.

PVC enable or PVC disable.


PVC enable Enable
Disabled by default.

4.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ADSL service in the transparent mode is shown in
Figure 4-3.

4-10 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-3 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

Version: A/1 4-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

4.2.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN, so as to limit the VLAN range of the designated
service traffic.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service Vlan to access the Uplink Service Vlan tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Mode

4.2.7 Configuring an ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters such as the uplink / downlink rate mode and the line
type of an ADSL line profile.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

4-12 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigADSL Line Profile from the


Menu Tree pane to bring up the ADSL Line Profile.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add an
ADSL line profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Configuring ADSL Line Profile - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

4.2.8 Binding an ADSL Port to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind the set ADSL line profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandAD Port Binding Line Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the AD Port Binding Line Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of TEMPLATENAME in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select adsl from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item and select adsl
for the Max Value item respectively and keep the default values for other
parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar, as shown in
Figure 4-6.

Version: A/1 4-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 The Completion of Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in
Transparent Mode

4.2.9 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure port rate limiting profile and parameters include uplink / downlink Policing
status and uplink / downlink port guaranteed rate.

4-14 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPort Rate Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a port
rate limiting profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

4.2.10 Binding an ADSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind the set rate limiting profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Binding Rate Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the Port Binding Rate Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-9.

Version: A/1 4-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-9 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

4.2.11 Configuring a PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPVC Profile from the Menu Tree


pane to bring up the PVC Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-10.

4-16 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-10 Configuring PVC Profile - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

4.2.12 Binding an ADSL Port to the PVC Profile

Bind the set PVC profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandAPort Binding PVC Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the APort Binding PVC Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of Profile ID in the Batch
Modify dialog box that appears.

4. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item and
keep the default values for other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in
the menu bar, as shown in Figure 4-11.

Version: A/1 4-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-11 Binding PVC Profile to ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 The Completion of Binding PVC Profile to the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in
the Transparent Transmission Mode

4.2.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on the
unicast service flow.

4-18 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort VLAN Config from the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the Port VLAN Config tab.

3. Click the expand button of AD64 in the left pane to display all 64 ports of the
AD64 card.

4. Click PVC Index, and select 64 ports with PVC index 0 while holding down the
left mouse button. See Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 The Selection of Port with PVC Index 0 - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

5. Click Add Port Service Vlan on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. In the Choose PVC Index dialog box that appears, click the expand button
next to AD64 to display 64 ports of the card. Select the AD64 check box to
select all 64 ports, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Version: A/1 4-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-14 PVC Index Selection - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

8. Click OK to return to the Port Service VLAN Config window.

9. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

10. In the Batch Modify dialog box, click Service Type and select unicast from
the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and all selected service types will be
set to unicast in a batch manner.

11. Click CVLAN mode and select Transparent from the Start Value drop-down
list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN modes will be set to Transparent
in a batch manner.

12. Select CVLAN ID and enter "100" in the Start Value and 1 in the Plus Value.
Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 100 to 163.

4-20 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Note:

When the VLAN ID increments or decrements by a value, the Start Value


is the modified initial value, the Plus Value is the incremental or
decremental value between two consecutive VLAN IDs, and the Repeat
Times is the number of times the value is repeated before each
incremental computation.

13. Click CVLAN COS and select 0 from the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the
default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the
toolbar and all selected CVLAN priority will be set to 0 in a batch manner.

14. Select the row of QINQ Enable; select Enable from the Start Value drop-
down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify
Selected Item on the toolbar and all QinQ functions will be set to Enable in a
batch manner.

15. Select QINQ VLAN ID and enter 1000 in the Start Value. Keep the default
settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and
all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 1000.

16. Select the row of QINQ COS and keep the default values for all parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar to modify the QinQ priority levels
to 0 in a batch manner.

17. In the Port Service VLAN Config window, click Write To Device on the
toolbar to complete the configuration. See Figure 4-15.

Version: A/1 4-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-15 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN - ADSL Service in Transparent
Mode

4.2.14 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. The port fails in receiving and transmitting data if it is in the
disabled status.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click EditBatch Modify menu in the toolbar, and select the row of
ENABLEFLAG in the Batch Modify dialog box that appears.

4. Select Enable from the Start Value drop-down list and click on the toolbar, as
shown in Figure 4-16.

4-22 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 The Completion of Enabling ADSL Port - ADSL Service in Transparent Mode

4.2.15 Enabling the Port PVC

Configure the enable status of the port PVC.

Version: A/1 4-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPVC Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
PVC Enable tab.

3. Click the expand button of AD64 in the left pane to display all 64 ports of the
AD64 card.

4. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

5. Select the row of PVC enable and enter 64 in the Modify Rows and select
Enable in the drop-down list of the Start Value in the Batch Modify dialog box
that appears. Keep the other parameters by default.

6. Click Modify Selected Item in the toolbar and the PVCs of 64 ports with index
0 are modified into enable.

7. In the PVC enable window, click Write to Device on the toolbar to complete
the configuration. See Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 The Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent Mode

4.2.16 Configuration Result

After being added with stacked VLANs, the PCs from 1 to 64 can access Internet
through a dial-up.

4-24 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.3 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services


in the Tag Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of the ADSL data service in the
Tag mode.

4.3.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card to provision the data
service in the Tag mode. In the following paragraphs the AD64 card is used as an
example.

u If the equipment only needs the single VLAN, user should not enable the QinQ
function and set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured CVLAN. If the
equipment needs the QinQ VLAN, users should enable the QinQ function and
set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured SVLAN.

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID
added into the data service should be within this range.

u The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports, and the CASA card provides 32
ADSL user ports. One ADSL port corresponds to eight PVC channels. One
PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one ADSL port
can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the subscriber
services are shared among the PVCs.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example, we use the Tag mode.

u When users use the AD64 card as the service interface card, subscribers PCs
are connected with ports on them using modems; that is, packets from the
subscribers are all untagged. Then the Ethernet frames are respectively added
with the stacked VLANs by the AN5006-20 and uplinked to the upper layer
network.

4.3.2 Network Diagram

The network of the ADSL service in the Tag mode is shown in Figure 4-19.

Version: A/1 4-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-19 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Tagged Mode

Each PC is connected to one of the 64 ports on the AD64 card provided by the
AN5006-20. Then the AN5006-20 adds the Ethernet frames from the 64 subscribers
with a CVLAN Tag 100 to 163 and adds the SVLAN Tag 1000. After that, the
equipment uplinks the services to the upper-layer network. In the downlink direction,
the reverse process takes place.

4.3.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 is used as the interface card at the subscriber
side. The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


Service Name data
network planning of the operator.

Configure according to the


Start VLAN ID 1000
network planning of the operator.

Configure according to the


Configuring End VLAN ID 3000
network planning of the operator.
uplink service
parameters Uplink port
Configure according to the
number or
number of the actually used uplink 19:SFP1
TRUNK group
port or the TRUNK group.
number
Configure according to the
TAG/UNTAG TAG
network planning of the operator.

4-26 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Data should be selected for data


Service Type data
service.
Two modes: Auto Add and
Add-slot Mode Auto Add
Manual Add.
Configure according to the
network planning of the operator.
Service Name data2
The maximum length of the
service name is 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink
port service. The value range: 1 to
4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and
Starting VLAN ID 1000
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The ending VLAN ID number of


the uplink port service. The value
range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088,
Ending VLAN ID 1000
4089, and 4092). The starting
VLAN ID should not be larger than
the ending VLAN ID.
Configuring The port number of the uplink
Port number or
uplink service service VLAN or the Trunk group PON
the trunk group ID
VLAN number.
Set the VLAN tag attribute of the
uplink service. The attribute
includes untag or tag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the port and the
packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag tag
untag form, while the
downlink untag packets will
be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink / downlink data
packets will not be processed
when they pass the port.

Version: A/1 4-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


Profile Name adsl
network planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to


Transmission the operators network planning; Adsl2+ Adsl2 G.
Mode the default setting is Adsl2+Adsl2 dmt ReAdsl2
G.dmt ReAdsl2.
Uplink channel rate mode; fixed,
Up Rate Mode adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime. adaptAtStart
The default mode is adaptAtStart.

The downlink channel rate,


including three modes: fixed,
Down Rate Mode adaptAtStart, and adaptAtRuntime. adaptAtStart
The default value is adaptAtStart.
The default mode is adaptAtStart.

Five types: NoChannel, Fast,


Line Type interleave, FastOrInterleave, and interleave
FastAndInterleave.

Configuring an The value range is 0 to 100000;


ADSL Line Min Rate Down the unit is kbit/s; and the default 0
Profile value is 0kbit/s.
The value range is 0 to 100000;
Min Rate Up the unit is kbit/s; and the default 0
value is 0kbit/s.
SNRMDn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
SNRMUp (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit
Max SNRMDn (dB) is dB; and the default value is 31
31dB.
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit
Max SNRMUp (dB) is dB; and the default value is 31
31dB.
Min. Signal-to-
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit
Noise Ratio 0
is dB; and the default value is 0dB.
Margin Down (dB)

Min. Signal-to-
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit
Noise Ratio 0
is dB; and the default value is 0dB.
Margin Up (dB)

4-28 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value range is 0 to 63; the unit


MaxInterleaveDe-
is ms; and the default value is 16
layDn (ms)
16ms.
The value range is 0 to 63; the unit
MaxInterleaveDe-
is ms; and the default value is 16
layUp (ms)
16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16
MinINPDn Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


MinINPUp Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

Enables or disables the downlink


BitSwapDn bit swap function. The default Disable
value is Disable.
Enables or disables the uplink bit
BitSwapUp swap function. The default value is Disable
Disable.
Four power modes: L0Mode,
Power Mode L2Mode, L3Mode, L2AndL3Mode. L0Mode
The default mode is L0Mode.
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
PmL0Time (s) unit is second; and the default 300
value is 300 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
PmL2Time (s) unit is second; and the default 30
value is 30 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 15; the unit
PmL2Atprt (dB) 3
is dB; and the default value is 3dB.
The value range is 0 to 1024; the
PmL2Rate (kbps) unit is kbit/s; and the default value 32
is 32kbit/s.
Sets the ToneBlackout band. The
ToneBlackoutSet -
default is empty.

The slot number of the AD64 card


Slot No. 3
Binding an ADSL in actual use.
Port to the ADSL The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
Line Profile in actual use.
ADSL Line Profile The configured ADSL line profile. adsl

Version: A/1 4-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


network planning of the operator.
Profile Name The maximum length is 20 DEFPVC.PRF
characters. The default value is
defaultPvcPrf.
Configuring a
The PVC index number. The value
PVC Profile PVC index 0
range is from 0 to 7.

Virtual path The value ranges from 0 to 255,


8
identifier and the default value is 8.
Virtual channel The value range is 0, 32 to 65535,
35
identifier and the default value is 35.
The slot number of the AD64 card
Slot No. 3
Binding an ADSL in actual use.
Port to the PVC The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
Profile in actual use.
PVC Profile ID Select the configured PVC profile. DEFPVC.PRF
Configure according to the
network planning of the operator.
PORTRATE.
Profile Name The maximum length of the profile
PRF0
name is 20 characters. The
default profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink


Uplink Policing
Policing status function. The Disable
status
default value is Disable.
Uplink Port CIR The value range is from 64 to
512
(Kbit/s) 1000000. The unit is kbit/s.
Configuring Port
Rate Limiting The value range is from 0 to
US CBS (Byte) 20000
Profile 4294967294. The unit is Byte.

The value range is from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294. The unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing status Policing status function. The Enable
default value is Disable.
DS Policing CIR The value range is from 64 to
8000
(Kbit/s) 1000000. The unit is kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215. The unit is kbit/s.

4-30 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the AD64 card


Slot No. 3
in actual use.
Binding an ADSL
The port number of the AD64 card
Port to the Rate Port No. 1 to 64
in actual use.
Limiting Profile
Select the configured rate limiting PORTRATE.
Profile ID
profile. PRF0
The slot number of the AD64 card
Slot No. 3
in actual use.
The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
in actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The value
PVC index 0
range is from 0 to 7.

Configures the service type;


Service Type includes unicast and multicast. unicast
The data service is unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode for
this service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode Tag
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Configuring a Rules of the CVLAN translation.


Port Service When rules are required, this
VLAN CVlan Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- NULL
defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
CVLAN ID 100 to 163
4085.
The CVLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is
CVLAN priority 0
the highest priority while 0 is the
lowest priority.

The stacked VLANs, configured


according to the operators
QinQ Enable Enable
network planning. Select Enable
or Disable.

Version: A/1 4-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The QinQ rules for binding


services. This parameter is the
QinQ Rule ID name of the user-defined rule. NULL
When rules are not required, set
this parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
QINQ VLAN ID 1000
4085.
The SVLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is
QINQ priority 0
the highest priority while 0 is the
lowest priority.

The slot number of the AD64 card


Slot No. 3
in actual use.
Enabling the The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
ADSL Port in actual use.
Enables or disables the ADSL port.
ENABLEFLAG Enable
Disabled by default.

The slot number of the AD64 card


Slot No. 3
in actual use.
The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
Enabling the Port in actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The value
PVC index 0
range is from 0 to 7.

PVC enable or PVC disable.


PVC enable Enable
Disabled by default.

4.3.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ADSL service in the tagged mode is shown in
Figure 4-20.

4-32 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-20 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode

Version: A/1 4-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

4.3.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN, so as to limit the VLAN range of the designated
service traffic.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service Vlan to access the Uplink Service Vlan tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the Tagged Mode

4.3.7 Configuring an ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters such as the uplink / downlink rate mode and the line
type of an ADSL line profile.

4-34 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigADSL Line Profile from the


Menu Tree pane to bring up the ADSL Line Profile.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add an
ADSL line profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Configuring ADSL Line Profile for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.8 Binding an ADSL Port to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind the set ADSL line profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandAD Port Binding Line Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the AD Port Binding Line Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of TEMPLATENAME in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

Version: A/1 4-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4. Select adsl from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item and select adsl
for the Max Value item respectively and keep the default values for other
parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar, as shown in
Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23 Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 The Completion of Binding ADSL Line Profile to ADSL Port for ADSL Service in
the Tag Mode

4-36 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.3.9 Configuring a PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPVC Profile from the Menu Tree


pane to bring up the PVC Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 Configuring PVC Profile for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.10 Binding an ADSL Port to the PVC Profile

Bind the set PVC profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 4-37


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Config CommandAPort Binding PVC Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the APort Binding PVC Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of Profile ID in the Batch
Modify dialog box that appears.

4. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item and
keep the default values for other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in
the menu bar, as shown in Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 Binding PVC Profile to ADSL Port for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 The Completion of Binding PVC Profile to the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in
the Tag Mode

4-38 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.3.11 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure port rate limiting profile and parameters include uplink / downlink Policing
status and uplink / downlink port guaranteed rate.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPort Rate Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a port
rate limiting profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.12 Binding an ADSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind the set rate limiting profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 4-39


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Config CommandPort Binding Rate Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the Port Binding Rate Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on the
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort VLAN Config from the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the Port VLAN Config tab.

3. Click the expand button of AD64 in the left pane to display all 64 ports of the
AD64 card.

4. Click PVC Index, and select 64 ports with PVC index 0 while holding down the
left mouse button. See Figure 4-30.

4-40 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-30 The Selection of Port with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

5. Click Add Port Service Vlan on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. In the Choose PVC Index dialog box that appears, click the expand button
next to AD64 to display 64 ports of the card. Select the AD64 check box to
select all 64 ports, as shown in Figure 4-31.

Version: A/1 4-41


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-31 PVC Index Selection for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

8. Click OK to return to the Port Service VLAN Config window.

9. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

10. In the Batch Modify dialog box, click Service Type and select unicast from
the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and all selected service types will be
set to unicast in a batch manner.

11. Click CVLAN mode and select TAG from the Start Value drop-down list.
Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN modes will be set to Tag in a batch
manner.

12. Select CVLAN ID and enter "100" in the Start Value and 1 in the Plus Value.
Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 100 to 163.

4-42 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Note:

When the VLAN ID increments or decrements by a value, the Start Value


is the modified initial value, the Plus Value is the incremental or
decremental value between two consecutive VLAN IDs, and the Repeat
Times is the number of times the value is repeated before each
incremental computation.

13. Click CVLAN COS and select 0 from the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the
default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the
toolbar and all selected CVLAN priority will be set to 0 in a batch manner.

14. Select the row of QINQ Enable; select Enable from the Start Value drop-
down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify
Selected Item on the toolbar and all QinQ functions will be set to Enable in a
batch manner.

15. Select QINQ VLAN ID and enter 1000 in the Start Value. Keep the default
settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and
all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 1000.

16. Select the row of QINQ COS and keep the default values for all parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar to modify the QinQ priority levels
to 0 in a batch manner.

17. In the Port Service VLAN Config window, click Write To Device on the
toolbar to complete the configuration. See Figure 4-32.

Version: A/1 4-43


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-32 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode

4.3.14 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. The port fails in receiving and transmitting data if it is in the
disabled status.

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of ENABLEFLAG in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select Enable from the Start Value drop-down list and click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar, as shown in Figure 4-33.

4-44 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-33 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34 The Completion of Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.15 Enabling the Port PVC

Configure the enable status of the port PVC.

Version: A/1 4-45


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPVC Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
PVC Enable tab.

3. Click the expand button of AD64 in the left pane to display all 64 ports of the
AD64 card.

4. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

5. Select the row of PVC enable and enter 64 in the Modify Rows and select
Enable in the drop-down list of the Start Value in the Batch Modify dialog box
that appears. Keep the other parameters by default.

6. Click Modify Selected Item in the toolbar and the PVCs of 64 ports with index
0 are modified into enable.

7. In the PVC enable window, click Write to Device on the toolbar to complete
the configuration. See Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 The Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.16 Configuration Result

After being added with stacked VLANs, the PCs from 1 to 64 can access Internet
through a dial-up.

4-46 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.4 Example of Configuring VDSL Data Services


in the 1:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of the VDSL data service in the
1:1 translation mode.

4.4.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64 or VD32 card to provision the data service
in the 1:1 translation mode. In the following paragraphs the VD32 card is used as an
example.

u If the equipment only needs the single VLAN, user should not enable the QinQ
function and set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured CVLAN. If the
equipment needs the QinQ VLAN, users should enable the QinQ function and
set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured SVLAN.

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID
added into the data service should be within this range.

u The VD32 card provides 32 ADSL user ports; and one VDSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,
the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

u When the ATM mode is used, users must configure the PVC functions, and the
VDSL service is valid on the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, users cannot
configure the PVC functions, and the VDSL service is valid on the port.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. The example is configured in the 1:1 translation mode.

Version: A/1 4-47


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

u When users use the VD32 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frame uplinked from the subscriber end is added with the VLAN Tag via the
users intelligent exchange or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And
then the VLAN ID is translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment;
each subscriber VLAN ID is translated into a different VLAN ID. After the
translation, the service is added with the SVLAN Tag and uplinked to the upper
layer network.

u The user-configured COS value is invalid in the 1:1 translation mode, and the
system uses the COS value of the tag in the original messages by default.

4.4.2 Network Diagram

The network of the VDSL data service in the 1:1 translation mode is shown
Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36 Network Diagram of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Each PC is connected to one of the 32 ports on the VD32 card provided by the
AN5006-20 via a home gateway using the VDSL. The home gateway adds a
CVLAN Tag (ranging from 100 to 131) to the service from each PC. The AN5006-20
translates the Ethernet frames from the 32 subscribers into CVLAN Tag 200 to 231,
adds the SVLAN Tag 1000, and transmits to the provider network. In the downlink
direction, the reverse process takes place.

4.4.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card in Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 is used as the interface card at the
subscriber side. The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are
compulsory. The planning data are shown in Table 4-3.

4-48 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Service Name data
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Start VLAN ID 1000
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


End VLAN ID 3000
planning of the operator.
Configuring uplink
Uplink port number Configure according to the number of the
service parameters
or TRUNK group actually used uplink port or the TRUNK 19:SFP1
number group.

Configure according to the network


TAG/UNTAG TAG
planning of the operator.

Service Type Data should be selected for data service. data


Add-slot Mode Auto Add or Manual Add Auto Add
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The maximum
Service Name data3
length of the service name is 30
characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port
Starting VLAN ID 1000
service. The value range is from 1 to 4095.

The ending VLAN ID number of the uplink


port service. The value range is from 1 to
Ending VLAN ID 1000
4095. The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

Port number or the The port number of the uplink service


PON
Configuring uplink trunk group ID VLAN or the Trunk group number.
service VLAN
Set the VLAN tagging attribute of the uplink
service. The attribute includes untag or tag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag tag
untag form, while the downlink untag
packets will be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink /
downlink data packets will not be
processed when they pass the port.

Version: A/1 4-49


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Profile Name vdline
planning of the operator.

The options include ATM, PTM and self


Port Mode PTM
adaptation. The default setting is PTM.

Includes 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B, 17A,


Standard Profile ALL
30A and ALL. The default setting is ALL.

Each group represents one power


Power Spectrum spectrum, including A_EU_128, B7_BT_ B8_11_998ADE17_
Profile ANFP, C_138_b, etc. The default value is M2x_A
B8_11_998ADE17_M2x_A.
Configuring the VDSL The value range is from 0.0 to 25.5 (unit:
line basic profile Max Tx power dBm) with a measurement carried to one
20.5
Down decimal place. The default setting is 20.5
dBm.
The value range is from 0.0 to 20.2 (unit:
dBm) with a measurement carried to one
Max Tx power Up 14.5
decimal place. The default setting is 14.5
dBm.
Sets the starting and ending bands of slot
Slot Band Config -
according to the actual condition.

Filtering Band Sets the starting and ending bands of


-
Config filtering according to the actual condition.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
Binding a VDSL port use.
to the VDSL line The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1 to 32
basic profile use.
VDSL Line Profile The configured basic VDSL line profile. vdline
Configure according to the network
Profile Name vdservice
planning of the operator.

The options include fixed, adaptAtStart,


Up Rate Mode adaptAtStart
and adaptAtRuntime.
Configuring the VDSL The options include fixed, adaptAtStart,
Down Rate Mode adaptAtStart
Service Profile and adaptAtRuntime.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:


Target SNRM Dn dB) with a measurement carried to one
6.0
(dB) decimal place. The default setting is 6.0
dB.

4-50 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Max. SNRM Mode The options include Customize and No


Customize
Dn limit. The default setting is Customize.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:


dB) with a measurement carried to one
Max. SNRMDn (dB) 31.0
decimal place. The default setting is 31.0
dB.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:
dB) with a measurement carried to one
Min SNRMDn (dB) 0.0
decimal place. The default setting is 0.0
dB.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:
Target SNRM Up dB) with a measurement carried to one
6.0
(dB) decimal place. The default setting is 6.0
dB.
Max. Target SNRM The options include Customize and No
Customize
Up limit. The default setting is Customize.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:


dB) with a measurement carried to one
Max SNRMUp (dB) 31.0
decimal place. The default setting is 31.0
dB.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:
dB) with a measurement carried to one
Min SNRMUp (dB) 0.0
decimal place. The default setting is 0.0
dB.
MaxInterleaveDe- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
16
layDn (ms) and the default value is 16ms.
MaxInterleaveDe- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
16
layUp (ms) and the default value is 16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and
MinINPDn 0 Symbol
the default value is 0 Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and


MinINPUp 0 Symbol
the default value is 0 Symbol.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
use.
Binding an VDSL Port
The port number of the VD32 card in actual
to the VDSL Service Port No. 1 to 32
use.
Profile
VDSL Service
Select the configured VDSL service profile. vdservice
Profile

Version: A/1 4-51


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


planning of the operator. The maximum
Profile Name PORTRATE.PRF0
length of the profile name is 20 characters.
The default profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink Policing


Uplink Policing
status function. The default value is Enable
status
Disable.
Uplink Port CIR The value range is from 64 to 1000000.
512
(Kbit/s) The unit is kbit/s.

Configuring port rate The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


US CBS (Byte) 20000
limiting profile The unit is Byte.

The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


US EBS (Byte) 20000
The unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink Policing


DS Policing status status function. The default value is Enable
Disable.
DS Policing CIR The value range is from 64 to 1000000.
8000
(Kbit/s) The unit is kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to 16777215.
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
The unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
Slot No. 2
Binding an VDSL port use.
to the rate limiting The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1 to 32
profile use.
Profile ID Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0
The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
Slot No. 1
use.
The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1 to 32
use.
The PVC in actual use. The value range is
PVC index 0
from 0 to 7.
Configuring a port
Configures the service type; includes
service VLAN
Service Type unicast and multicast. The data service is unicast
unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the transparent
CVLAN Mode Translation
mode and the translation mode are
supported.

4-52 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When


rules are required, this parameter is the
CVlan Rule ID NULL
name of the user-defined rule; when rules
are not required, set this parameter to null.

CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

CVLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4085. 100 to 131


The CVLAN priority level. The value ranges
CVLAN priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority 0
while 0 is the lowest priority.

TTPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The VLAN ID after translation; the value
Translation Vlan ID 200 to 231
ranges from 1 to 4085.

The translation priority level. The value


Translation COS ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest 0
priority while 0 is the lowest priority.

The stacked VLANs, configured according


QinQ Enable to the operators network planning. Select Enable
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding services. This
parameter is the name of the user-defined
QinQ Rule ID NULL
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4085. 1000


The SVLAN priority level. The value ranges
QINQ priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority 0
while 0 is the lowest priority.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
use.
Enabling the VDSL The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1 to 32
Port use.
Enables or disables the ADSL port.
ENABLEFLAG Enable
Disabled by default.

Version: A/1 4-53


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.4.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL service in the 1:1 translation mode is shown in
Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

4-54 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.4.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

4.4.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN, so as to limit the VLAN range of the designated
service traffic.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service VLAN to access the Uplink Service VLAN tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.4.7 Configuring the Basic Profile of the VDSL Line

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, including port mode, power
spectrum profile and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

Version: A/1 4-55


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigVD Basic Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the VD Basic Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-39.

Figure 4-39 Configuring VDSL Basic Line Profile for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

4.4.8 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind the set VDSL line profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandVD Port Binding Line Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the VD Port Binding Line Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of TEMPLATENAME in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select vdline from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item, select vdline
for the Max Value item respectively and keep the default values for other
parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar, as shown in
Figure 4-40.

4-56 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-40 Binding VDSL Basic Line Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-41.

Figure 4-41 The Completion of Binding VDSL Basic Line Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL
Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: A/1 4-57


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.4.9 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, including the uplink / downlink rate mode and
maximum / minimum uplink & downlink rate.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigVDSL Service Profile from the


Menu Tree pane to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 Configuring VDSL Profile for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

4.4.10 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind the set VDSL service profile to the designated port. The port controls data
stream according to transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandVD Port Binding Service Profile from the Menu
Tree pane to bring up the VD Port Binding Service Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of TEMPLATENAME in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4-58 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4. Select vdservice from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item, select
vdservice for the Max Value item respectively and keep the default values for
other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar, as shown in
Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Service Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-44.

Figure 4-44 The Completion of Binding VDSL Service Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: A/1 4-59


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.4.11 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure port rate limiting profile and parameters include uplink / downlink Policing
status and uplink / downlink port guaranteed rate.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPort Rate Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a port
rate limiting profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-45.

Figure 4-45 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.4.12 Binding a VDSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind the set rate limiting profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

4-60 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select Config CommandPort Binding Rate Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the Port Binding Rate Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of Profile ID in the Batch
Modify dialog box.

4. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item
and keep the default values for other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
in the menu bar, as shown in Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-47.

Version: A/1 4-61


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-47 The Completion of Binding Rate Limiting Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in
the 1:1 Translation Mode

4.4.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on the
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort VLAN Config from the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the Port VLAN Config tab.

3. Click the expand button of VD32 in the left pane to display all 32 ports of the
VD32 card.

4. Click PVC Index, and select 32 ports with PVC index 0 while holding down the
left mouse button. See Figure 4-48.

4-62 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-48 The Selection of the Port with PVC Index 0 for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

5. Click Add Port Service Vlan on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. In the Choose PVC Index dialog box that appears, click the expand button
before VD32 to display 32 ports of the card. Select the VD32 check box to
select all 32 ports, as shown in Figure 4-49.

Version: A/1 4-63


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-49 PVC Index Selection for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

8. Click OK to return to the Port Service VLAN Config window.

9. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

10. In the Batch Modify dialog box, click Service Type and select unicast from
the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and all selected service types will be
set to unicast in a batch manner.

11. Click CVLAN mode and select Translation from the Start Value drop-down
list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN modes will be set to Translation in
a batch manner.

12. Select CVLAN ID and enter "100" in the Start Value and 1 in the Plus Value.
Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 100 to 131.

4-64 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Note:

When the VLAN ID increments or decrements by a value, the Start Value


is the modified initial value, the Plus Value is the incremental or
decremental value between two consecutive VLAN IDs, and the Repeat
Times is the number of times the value is repeated before each
incremental computation.

13. Click CVLAN COS and select 0 from the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the
default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the
toolbar and all selected CVLAN priority will be set to 0 in a batch manner.

14. Select Translation Vlan ID and enter 200 in the Start Value and 1 in the Plus
Value. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar and all selected VLAN IDs will be set to 200 to 231.

15. Select the row of Translation COS and keep the default values for all
parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar to modify the QinQ
priority levels to 0 in a batch manner.

16. Select the row of QINQ Enable; select Enable from the Start Value drop-
down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify
Selected Item on the toolbar and all QinQ functions will be set to Enable in a
batch manner.

17. Select QINQ VLAN ID and enter 1000 in the Start Value. Keep the default
settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and
all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 1000.

18. Select the row of QINQ COS and keep the default values for all parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar to modify the QinQ priority levels
to 0 in a batch manner.

19. In the Port Service VLAN Config window, click Write To Device on the
toolbar to complete the configuration. See Figure 4-50.

Version: A/1 4-65


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-50 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN for VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode

4.4.14 Enabling the VDSL Port

Enable the VDSL port. The port fails in receiving and transmitting data if it is in the
disabled status.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of ENABLEFLAG in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select Enable from the Start Value drop-down list and click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar, as shown in Figure 4-51.

4-66 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-51 Enabling VDSL Port for VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52 The Completion of Enabling VDSL Port For the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode

Version: A/1 4-67


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.4.15 Configuration Result

After being added with stacked VLANs, the PCs from 1 to 64 can access Internet
through a dial-up.

4.5 Example of Configuring VDSL Data Services


in the N:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of the VDSL data service in the
N:1 translation mode.

4.5.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64 or VD32 card to provision the data service
in the N:1 translation mode. In the following paragraphs the VD32 card is used as
an example.

u If the equipment only needs the single VLAN, user should not enable the QinQ
function and set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured CVLAN. If the
equipment needs the QinQ VLAN, users should enable the QinQ function and
set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured SVLAN.

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID
added into the data service should be within this range.

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

u When the ATM mode is used, users must configure the PVC functions, and the
VDSL service is valid on the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, users cannot
configure the PVC functions, and the VDSL service is valid on the port.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. The example is configured in the N:1 translation mode.

4-68 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When users use the VD32 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frame uplinked from the subscriber end is added with the VLAN TAG via the
users intelligent exchange or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And
then the VLAN ID is translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment;
each subscriber VLAN ID is translated into a different VLAN ID. After the
translation, the service is added with the SVLAN TAG and uplinked to the upper
layer network.

u The user-configured COS value is invalid in the N:1 translation mode, and the
system uses the COS value of the tag in the original messages by default.

4.5.2 Network Diagram

The network of the VDSL data service in the N:1 translation mode is shown
Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Network Diagram of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

The two PCs are connected to Port 1 on the VD32 card provided by the AN5006-20
via a home gateway using the VDSL. The home gateway adds a CVLAN Tag
(ranging from 100 to 101) to the service from each PC. The AN5006-20 then
translates the Ethernet frames from the 2 subscribers into CVLAN Tag 200, and
then adds the SVLAN Tag 1000 to transmit them to the upper level network. In the
downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

4.5.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card of the AN5006-20 is used as the interface card at the subscriber
side. The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 4-4.

Version: A/1 4-69


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Service Name data
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Start VLAN ID 1000
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


End VLAN ID 3000
planning of the operator.
Configuring uplink
Uplink port number or Configure according to the number of the
service parameters
TRUNK group actually used uplink port or the TRUNK 19:SFP1
number group.

Configure according to the network


TAG/UNTAG TAG
planning of the operator.

Service Type Data should be selected for data service. data


Add-slot Mode Two modes: Auto Add and Manual Add. Auto Add
Configure according to the network
Service Name planning of the operator. The maximum data4
length of the service name is 30 characters.

The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port


Starting VLAN ID 1000
service. The value range is from 1 to 4095.

The ending VLAN ID number of the uplink


port service. The value range is from 1 to
Ending VLAN ID 1000
4095. The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

Port number or the The port number of the uplink service VLAN
GE1
trunk group ID or the Trunk group number.
Configuring uplink
service VLAN Set the VLAN tagging attribute of the uplink
service. The attribute includes untag or tag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag tag
untag form, while the downlink untag
packets will be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink /
downlink data packets will not be
processed when they pass the port.

Configuring the VDSL Configure according to the network


Profile Name vdline
line basic profile planning of the operator.

4-70 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The options include ATM, PTM and self


Port Mode self adaptation
adaptation. The default setting is PTM.

Includes 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B, 17A,


Standard Profile ALL
30A and ALL. The default setting is ALL.

Each group represents one power


Power Spectrum spectrum, including A_EU_128, B7_BT_ B8_11_998ADE17_
Profile ANFP, C_138_b, etc. The default value is M2x_A
B8_11_998ADE17_M2x_A.

The value range is from 0.0 to 25.5 (unit:


dBm) with a measurement carried to one
Max Tx power Down 20.5
decimal place. The default setting is 20.5
dBm.
The value range is from 0.0 to 20.2 (unit:
dBm) with a measurement carried to one
Max Tx power Up 14.5
decimal place. The default setting is 14.5
dBm.
Slot Band Config Sets the starting and ending bands of slot. -

Sets the starting and ending bands of


Filtering Band Config -
filtering.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
Binding a VDSL port use.
to the VDSL line The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
basic profile use.
VDSL Line Profile The configured VDSL line profile. vdline
Configure according to the network
Profile Name vdservice
planning of the operator.

The options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and


Up Rate Mode adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime.

The options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and


Configuring the VDSL Down Rate Mode adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime.
Service Profile
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:
Target SNRM Dn
dB) with a measurement carried to one 6.0
(dB)
decimal place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

Max. SNRM Mode The options include Customize and No


Customize
Dn limit. The default setting is Customize.

Version: A/1 4-71


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:


dB) with a measurement carried to one
Max. SNRMDn (dB) 31.0
decimal place. The default setting is 31.0
dB.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:
Min SNRMDn (dB) dB) with a measurement carried to one 0.0
decimal place. The default setting is 0.0 dB.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:


Target SNRM Up
dB) with a measurement carried to one 6.0
(dB)
decimal place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

Max. Target SNRM The options include Customize and No


Customize
Up limit. The default setting is Customize.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:


dB) with a measurement carried to one
Max SNRMUp (dB) 31.0
decimal place. The default setting is 31.0
dB.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit:
Min SNRMUp (dB) dB) with a measurement carried to one 0.0
decimal place. The default setting is 0.0 dB.

MaxInterleaveDe- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;


16
layDn (ms) and the default value is 16ms.
MaxInterleaveDelay- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
16
Up (ms) and the default value is 16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and
MinINPDn 0 Symbol
the default value is 0 Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and


MinINPUp 0 Symbol
the default value is 0 Symbol.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
Binding an VDSL Port use.
to the VDSL Service The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Profile use.
VDSL Service Profile Select the configured VDSL service profile. vdservice
Configure according to the network
Configuring port rate planning of the operator. The maximum
Profile Name PORTRATE.PRF0
limiting profile length of the profile name is 20 characters.
The default profile name is NULL.

4-72 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the uplink Policing


Uplink Policing status status function. The default value is Enable
Disable.
Uplink Port CIR The value range is from 64 to 1000000. The
512
(Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.
US CBS (Byte) 2000
The unit is Byte.

The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


US EBS (Byte) 2000
The unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink Policing


DS Policing status status function. The default value is Enable
Disable.
DS Policing CIR The value range is from 64 to 1000000. The
8000
(Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to 16777215. The
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
Slot No. 2
Binding an VDSL port use.
to the rate limiting The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
profile use.
Profile ID Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0
The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
Slot No. 2
use.
The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
use.
The PVC in actual use. The value range is
PVC index 0
from 0 to 7.
Configures the service type; includes
Service Type unicast and multicast. The data service is unicast
Configuring a Port
unicast.
Service VLAN
Configure the CVLAN mode for this service;
CVLAN Mode the tag mode, the transparent mode and Translation
the translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When


rules are required, this parameter is the
CVlan Rule ID NULL
name of the user-defined rule; when rules
are not required, set this parameter to null.

CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

Version: A/1 4-73


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

CVLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4085. 100 to 101


The CVLAN priority level. The value ranges
CVLAN priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority 0
while 0 is the lowest priority.

TTPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The VLAN ID after translation; the value
Translation Vlan ID 200
ranges from 1 to 4085.

The translation priority level. The value


Translation priority ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest 0
priority while 0 is the lowest priority.

The stacked VLANs, configured according


QinQ Enable to the operators network planning. Select Enable
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding services. This
parameter is the name of the user-defined
QinQ Rule ID NULL
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4085. 1000


The SVLAN priority level. The value ranges
QINQ priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority 0
while 0 is the lowest priority.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
use.
Enabling the VDSL The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Port use.
Enables or disables the ADSL port.
ENABLEFLAG Enable
Disabled by default.

4-74 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.5.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL service in the N:1 translation mode is shown in
Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-54 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Version: A/1 4-75


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4.5.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

4.5.6 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN, so as to limit the VLAN range of the designated
service traffic.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service VLAN to access the Uplink Service VLAN tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode

4.5.7 Configuring the Basic Profile of the VDSL Line

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, including port mode, power
spectrum profile and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

4-76 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigVD Basic Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the VD Basic Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56 Configuring VDSL Basic Line Profile for VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode

4.5.8 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind the set VDSL line profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandVD Port Binding Line Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the VD Port Binding Line Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-57.

Version: A/1 4-77


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-57 The Completion of Binding VDSL Basic Line Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL
Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.5.9 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, including the uplink / downlink rate mode and
maximum / minimum uplink & downlink rate.

Procedure

1. Click the manage control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigVDSL Service Profile from the


Menu Tree pane to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Configuring VDSL Profile for VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4-78 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.5.10 Binding a VDSL Port to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind the set VDSL service profile to the designated port. The port controls data
stream according to transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandVD Port Binding Service Profile from the Menu
Tree pane to bring up the VD Port Binding Service Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 The Completion of Binding VDSL Service Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.5.11 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure port rate limiting profile and parameters include uplink / downlink Policing
status and uplink / downlink port guaranteed rate.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 4-79


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPort Rate Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a port
rate limiting profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-60.

Figure 4-60 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile for VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode

4.5.12 Binding a VDSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind the set rate limiting profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Binding Rate Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the Port Binding Rate Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-61.

4-80 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-61 The Completion of Binding Rate Limiting Profile to VDSL Port for VDSL Service in
the N:1 Translation Mode

4.5.13 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on the
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort VLAN Config from the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the Port VLAN Config tab.

3. Click the expand button before the VD32 at the left pane to display 32 ports of
the VD32 card. Select the port 1 and the item with PVC index 0 at the upper
right pane.

4. Click Add Port Service Vlan on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 2 and click OK.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Write To Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 4-62.

Version: A/1 4-81


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-62 The Completion of Configuring Port Service VLAN for VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode

4.5.14 Enabling the VDSL Port

Enable the VDSL port. The port fails in receiving and transmitting data if it is in the
disabled status.

Procedure

1. Click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click the entry of port No.1, and select Enable in the drop-down list of the
ENABLEFLAG.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-63.

4-82 Version: A/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-63 The Completion of Enabling VDSL Port For the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode

4.5.15 Configuration Result

After being added with stacked VLANs, the PCs from 1 to 2 can access Internet
through a dial-up.

Version: A/1 4-83


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

The following introduces the methods to provision the G.SHDSL service of the
AN5006-20 in the ATM and TDM modes.

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM

Version: A/1 5-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


Based on ATM

The following introduces the configuration method of the G.SHDSL service in the
transparent mode (based on ATM).

5.1.1 Configuration Rule

G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc. The AN5006-20
needs to use the HD32A card to implement the G.SHDSL service in the ATM
transparent mode.

ATM is a packet switch and multiplex technology based on cell. It is applicable in


LAN and WAN, with the features of fixed-length cell, connection-oriented, and good
real time performance, suitable for for the applications with high bandwidth, low
delay, and high data burst rate.

u If the equipment only needs the single VLAN, users should not enable the QinQ
function and should set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured
CVLAN. If the equipment needs the QinQ VLAN, users should enable the QinQ
function and set the outer VLAN to the corresponding configured SVLAN.

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4095. The outer VLAN ID
added into the data service should be within this range.

u The HD32 card provides 32 G.SHDSL user ports; and one G.SHDSL port
corresponds to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16
subscriber services. One G.SHDSL port can also be configured with up to 16
subscriber services.

u The HD32A card supports the 2-line / 4-line binding, so as to increase the line
rate. The 32 ports are divided into eight groups according to the port numbers,
four ports per group, namely 1 to 4, 5 to 8, 9 to 12, 13 to 16, 17 to 20, 21 to 24,
25 to 28,and 29 to 32.

4 Ports 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, and 29 are master ports, and the other ports
are slave ports.

4 In each group, the master port can either form 2-wire binding with a certain
slave port, or form 4-wire binding with the three slave ports.

5-2 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

4 This needs that the Modem connected with the equipment supports the 2-
line / 4-line binding function.

u The AN5006-20 supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example, we use the transparent mode.

u When users use the HD32A card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frame uplinked from the subscriber end is added with the CVLAN Tag via the
users intelligent exchange or a CPE uplinked with SHDSL. And then the
Ethernet frame is transmitted transparently by the AN5006-20 and is uplinked
to the OLT after being added with the SVLAN TAG.

5.1.2 Network Diagram

Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

Each PC is connected to one of the 32 ports on the HD32A card provided by the
AN5006-20 via a home gateway using the DSL (ports 1 and 2 provide a larger
bandwidth for PC1 in the bound group mode). The home gateway adds a CVLAN
TAG (ranging from 800 to 830) to the service from each PC. The AN5006-20 then
sends the Ethernet frames from the 32 subscribers transparently and adds an
SVLAN TAG 1000, and then sends the services to the providers network. In the
downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Version: A/1 5-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

5.1.3 Planning Data

The HD32 card in the slot 4 of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card,
and the management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required.
The planning data are shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the management


Slot No. 5
control card in actual use.
The port number of the management
Port No. control card in actual use, including the PON
GE1, GE2, GE3, and GE4 uplink ports.

The port type of the uplink card in actual


Port Type GE port
use.
Enables or disables the auto negotiation
function of the uplink port. It is not allowed
Port Auto Negotiate Enable
to disable the auto negotiation function of
the 10GE port.

The rate of the uplink port. The rates of the


Port Rate 10GE port and the GE port are 10000 Mbps 1000Mbps
and 1000 Mbps respectively.
Configuring uplink Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port.
port properties The mode includes full duplex mode and
Port Duplex Mode Full duplex
half duplex mode. Duplex mode is used by
default.
Enables or disables the flow control
function of the uplink port. Selecting means
Port Flow Control Disable
enabling, and clearing means disabling.
Disabled by default.

Enables or disables the address learning


Port address function of the uplink port. Selecting means
Enable
learning enabling, and clearing means disabling.
Enabled by default.

Enables or disables the priority function of


the uplink port. Selecting means enabling,
Port priority Enable
and clearing means disabling. Enabled by
default.

5-4 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The service priority value of the uplink port,


ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority
Port priority value 0
while 0 is the lowest priority. The default
setting is 0.

The interface mode of the uplink port;


includes SerDes and SGMII. The default
value is SerDes. When the uplink port uses
the optical module or forced GE electrical
Interface mode SerDes
module, the SerDes mode is configured.
When the uplink port uses the
10/100/1000Mbps electrical mode, the
SMGII mode is configured.

The slot number of the HD32A card in


Slot No. 4
actual use.
Enabling the SHDSL The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
port actual use.
Enables or disables the SHDSL port.
ENABLEFLAG Enable
Disabled by default

The slot number of the HD32A card in


Slot No. 4
actual use.
The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
Enabling the Port actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The value range is
PVC index 0
from 0 to 7.
PVC enable or PVC disable. Disabled by
PVC enable Enable
default
Configure according to the network
Service name planning of the operator. The maximum data
length of the service name is 30 characters.

The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port


Starting VLAN ID 1000
service. The value range is from 1 to 4095.
Configuring uplink
The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port
service VLAN
service. The value range is from 1 to 4095.
VLAN ID End 1000
The starting VLAN ID should not be larger
than the ending VLAN ID.

Port number or the The port number of the uplink service


5:PON
trunk group ID VLAN or the Trunk group number.

Version: A/1 5-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the VLAN tag attribute of the uplink


service. The attribute includes untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag TAG
untag form, while the downlink untag
packets will be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink
/ downlink data packets will not be
processed when they pass the port.

Configure according to the network


Line profile name ShdslATM
planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


Port mode operators network planning, including ATM ATM
and TDM.
Configure this item according to the
Line encoding type operators network planning, including PAM32
PAM16, PAM32, and auto.
Configure this item according to the
Transmission Mode operators network planning, including Annex B
Annex A and Annex B.
Configuring an Downlink target
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
SHDSL line profile signal-to-noise ratio 6
and the default value is 6 dB.
(DB)

Downlink assured
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
signal-to-noise ratio 3
and the default value is 3dB.
(DB)

Uplink target signal- The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
6
to-noise ratio (DB) and the default value is 6 dB.
Uplink assured
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
signal-to-noise ratio 3
and the default value is 3dB.
(DB)

Enables or disables the line detection


Line Detect Switch Disable
function. The default value is Disable.
Binding an SHDSL
The slot number of the HD32A card in
port to the SHDS line Slot No. 4
actual use.
profile

5-6 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The port number of the HD32A card in


Port No. 1 to 32
actual use.
SHDSL Line Profile The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslATM
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The maximum
Profile Name defaultPvcPrf
length is 20 characters. The default value is
defaultPvcPrf.
Configuring a PVC The PVC index number. The value range is
PVC index 0
Profile from 0 to 7.
Virtual path The value ranges from 0 to 255, and the
8
identifier default value is 8.
Virtual channel The value ranges is 0, 32 to 65535, and the
35
identifier default value is 35.
The slot number of the HD32A card in
Slot No. 4
Binding an SHDSL actual use.
Port to the PVC The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
Profile actual use.
PVC Profile ID Select the configured PVC profile. defaultPvcPrf
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The maximum
Profile Name PORTRATE.PRF0
length of the profile name is 20 characters.
The default profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink Policing


Uplink Policing
status function. The default value is Enable
status
Disable.
Uplink port
The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit
guaranteed rate 51200
is kbit/s; and the default value is 64.
Configuring Port Rate (Kbit/s)

Limiting Profile Uplink Committed The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


20000
Burst Size (Byte) The unit is Byte.

Uplink Excess Burst The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


20000
Size (Byte) The unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink Policing


Downlink Policing
status function. The default value is Enable
status
Disable.
Downlink port
The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit
guaranteed rate 51200
is kbit/s; and the default value is 64.
(Kbit/s)

Version: A/1 5-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Downlink Peak Cell The value range is from 0 to 16777215.


10240
Rate (Kbit/s) The unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the HD32A card in
Slot No. 4
Binding an SHDSL actual use.
Port to the Rate The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
Limiting Profile actual use.
Profile ID Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0
Line Bound Group
Is generated automatically by the system. -
ID
The slot number of the HD32A card in
Configuring the group Slot No. 4
actual use.
bound with the
Configure according to the network
SHDSL port Master Port No. 1
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Slave Port No. 2
planning of the operator.

The slot number of the HD32A card in


Slot No. 4
actual use.
The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The value range is
PVC index 0
from 0 to 7.
Configures the service type; includes
Service Type unicast and multicast. The data service is unicast
unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this

Configuring a Port service; the tag mode, the transparent


CVLAN Mode Transparent
service VLAN mode and the translation mode are
supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When


rules are required, this parameter is the
CVlan Rule ID null
name of the user-defined rule; when rules
are not required, set this parameter to null.

CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

CVLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 800 to 830


The CVLAN priority level. The value ranges
CVLAN priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority 0
while 0 is the lowest priority.

5-8 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The stacked VLANs, configured according


QinQ Enable to the operators network planning. Select Enable
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding services. This
parameter is the name of the user-defined
QinQ Rule ID null
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000


The SVLAN priority level. The value ranges
QINQ priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority 0
while 0 is the lowest priority.

5.1.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the G.SHDSL service in the ATM transparent mode is
shown in Figure 5-2.

Version: A/1 5-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode

5-10 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.5 Configuring Uplink Port Properties

Configure the uplink port properties, including the enabling status of the automatic
negotiation function, the port flow control status, the port priority, etc.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData service configPort Config


GE Port to access the GE Port tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode

5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. The port fails in receiving and transmitting data if it is in the
disabled status.

Configuration Procedure

1. Click the HD32A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

Version: A/1 5-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of ENABLEFLAG in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select Enable from the Start Value drop-down list and click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar, as shown in Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Port - SHDSL Service in ATM Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 The Completion of Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5-12 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC

Configure the enable status of the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Click the HD32A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPVC Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
PVC Enable tab.

3. Click HD32A in the left pane to display all 32 ports of the HD32A card in the
right pane.

4. Click PVC Index, and select 32 ports with PVC index 0 while holding down the
left mouse button. See Figure 5-6.

Figure 5-6 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode

5. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

6. Select the row of PVC enable and enter 32 in the Modify Rows and select
Enable in the drop-down list of the Start Value in the Batch Modify dialog box
that appears. Keep the other parameters by default.

7. Click Modify Selected Item in the toolbar and the PVCs of 32 ports with index
0 are modified into enable.

8. In the PVC enable window, click Write to Device on the toolbar to complete
the configuration. See Figure 5-7.

Version: A/1 5-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-7 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode

5.1.8 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN, so as to limit the VLAN range of the designated
service traffic.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service VLAN to access the Uplink Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5-14 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters such as port mode, line encoding type and line
transmission mode of the SHDSL line profile.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigSHDSL Line Profile from the


Menu Tree pane to bring up the SHDSL Line Profile.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add an
SHDSL line profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5.1.10 Binding an SHDSL Port to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind the set SHDSL line profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the HD32A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 5-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Config CommandSHDSL Port Binding Line Profile from the Menu
Tree pane to bring up the SHDSL Port Binding Line Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of TEMPLATENAME in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. In the Start Value, Min Value, and Max Value drop-down lists, select
ShdslATM, and keep the default settings of other parameters; click the Modify
Selected Item button in the toolbar, as shown in Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10 Binding the SHDSL Line Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-11.

5-16 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-11 The Completion of Binding the SHDSL Line Profile to SHDSL Port for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

5.1.11 Configuring a PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPVC Profile from the Menu Tree


pane to bring up the PVC Profile tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-12.

Version: A/1 5-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode

5.1.12 Binding an SHDSL Port to the PVC Profile

Bind the set PVC profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the HD32A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Binding PVC Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the Port Binding PVC Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of Profile ID in the Batch
Modify dialog box.

4. Select defaultPvcPrf from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item and
keep the default values for other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in
the menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-13.

5-18 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-13 Binding PVC Profile to SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in ATM Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-14.

Figure 5-14 Completion of Binding the PVC Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G. SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

Version: A/1 5-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

5.1.13 Configuring Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure port rate limiting profile and parameters include uplink/downlink Policing
status and uplink/downlink port guaranteed rate.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigPort Rate Profile from the Menu


Tree pane to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a port
rate limiting profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5.1.14 Binding an SHDSL Port to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind the set rate limiting profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the HD32A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

5-20 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select Config CommandPort Binding Rate Profile from the Menu Tree
pane to bring up the Port Binding Rate Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of Profile ID in the Batch
Modify dialog box.

4. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item
and keep the default values for other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
in the menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16 Binding Rate Limiting Profile to SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in ATM
Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-17.

Version: A/1 5-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-17 Binding the Rate Limiting Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Mode

5.1.15 Configuring SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters

Configure the SHDSL port bound group, so as to increase the line rate.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandSHDSL M-Pair to access


the SHDSL M-Pair tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.SHDSL Service
in the ATM Transparent Mode

5-22 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.16 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the HD32A card based on
the unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Click the HD32A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort VLAN Config from the Menu Tree pane to
bring up the Port VLAN Config tab.

3. Click HD32A in the left pane to display all 32 ports of the HD32A card in the
right pane.

4. Click PVC Index, and select 32 ports with PVC index 0 while holding down the
left mouse button. See Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 The Selection of the Port with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5. Click Add Port Service Vlan on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK. Configure the
parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

Version: A/1 5-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6. In the Choose PVC Index dialog box that appears, click the expand button
next to HD32A to display 32 ports of the card. Select the HD32A check box to
select all 32 ports, as shown in Figure 5-20.

Figure 5-20 Configuring the PVC Index Selection for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

7. Click OK to return to the Port Service VLAN Config window.

8. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

9. In the Batch Modify dialog box, click Service Type and select unicast from
the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and all selected service types will be
set to unicast in a batch manner.

10. Click CVLAN mode and select Transparent from the Start Value drop-down
list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN modes will be set to Transparent
in a batch manner.

11. Select CVLAN ID and enter "799" in the Start Value and 1 in the Plus Value.
Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item
on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 799 to 830.

5-24 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Note:

When the VLAN ID increments or decrements by a value, the Start Value


is the modified initial value, the Plus Value is the incremental or
decremental value between two consecutive VLAN IDs, and the Repeat
Times is the number of times the value is repeated before each
incremental computation.

12. Click CVLAN COS and select 0 from the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the
default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the
toolbar and all selected CVLAN priority will be set to 0 in a batch manner.

13. Select the row of QINQ Enable; select Enable from the Start Value drop-
down list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify
Selected Item on the toolbar and all QinQ functions will be set to Enable in a
batch manner.

14. Select QINQ VLAN ID and enter 1000 in the Start Value. Keep the default
settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and
all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 1000.

15. Select the row of QINQ COS and keep the default values for all parameters.
Click Modify Selected Item in the menu bar to modify the QinQ priority levels
to 0 in a batch manner.

16. Return to the Port Service VLAN Config window, click the first row in the
lower-right pane, and modify the CVID of port 1 to 800.

17. Click Write To Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 5-21.

Version: A/1 5-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-21 The Completion of Configuring the Port Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Mode

5.1.17 Configuration Result

After being added with stacked VLANs, the PCs from 1 to 31 can access Internet
through a dial-up.

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


Based on TDM

The following introduces the configuration method of the G.SHDSL service in the
transparent mode (based on TDM).

5.2.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the HDT8A card to implement the G.SHDSL service in the
TDM transparent mode.

G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc.

5-26 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

TDM means the time division multiplex mode. TDM refers to transmitting multiple
digital data, voice, and video signals at one medium at the same time via different
channels or timeslots. It needs clock synchronization, mainly used in PSTN.

u The HDT8A card can transmit the TDM service transparently, which does not
use the AN5006-20 uplink cards, and does not need to configure the uplink
related parameters.

u The supports multiple clock extraction modes, including the local clock and
extraction from one of E1 links 1 to 8.

u If the destination E1 link clock is unavailable, the equipment will search the
available E1 link for clock automatically in turn. If the users set to obtain the
clock from the first E1 link, but this link is unavailable, the equipment will extract
the clock from the second E1 link in turn, until the clock extraction succeeds.

5.2.2 Network Diagram

Figure 5-22 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

The PBX and E1 / V.35 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8A card
of the AN5006-20 via the Modem, and the user data are transparently transmitted to
the PSTN in the uplink direction via the E1 link of the HDT8A card. In the downlink
direction, the reverse process takes place.

5.2.3 Planning Data

The HDT8A card in the slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card,
and the manage control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 5-2.

Version: A/1 5-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-2 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual


Slot No. 1
use.
The E1 port number of the HDT8A card in
Configuring E1 Data Port No. E1-1
actual use.
Select the E1 interface impedance that is
Impedance 75
actually used. Includes 75 and 120.

The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual


Slot No. 1
use.
Configuring Clock
Extracts from the 1st
Main Clock Mode Sets the acquirement mode of the clock.
E1
The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual
Slot No. 1
use.
Enabling an SHDSL The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card
Port No. 1 to 8
Port in actual use.
Enables or disables the SHDSL port. Disabled
ENABLEFLAG Enable
by default.

Configure according to the network planning


Line profile name ShdslTDM
of the operator.

Configure this item according to the operators


Port Mode network planning. The port mode includes TDM
ATM and TDM.
Configure this item according to the operators
Line encoding type network planning. The port mode includes PAM32
PAM16, PAM32, and AUTO.
Configure this item according to the operators
Transmission Mode network planning. The port mode includes Annex B
Configuring an Annex A and Annex B.
SHDSL Line Profile Downlink target
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
signal-to-noise ratio 6
and the default value is 6dB.
(DB)

Downlink guarantee
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
signal-to-noise ratio 3
and the default value is 3dB.
(DB)

Uplink target signal- The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
6
to-noise ratio (DB) and the default value is 6dB.
Uplink guarantee
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
signal-to-noise ratio 3
and the default value is 3dB.
(DB)

5-28 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-2 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the line detection


Disable
function. The default value is Disable.
The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual
Slot No. 1
Binding an SHDSL use.
Port to the SHDSL The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card
Port No. 1 to 8
Line Profile in actual use.
SHDSL Line Profile The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslTDM
Is generated by the system. -
The slot number of the HD32A card in actual
Slot No. 1
use.
Configuring SHDSL
Configure according to the network planning
port bound group Master Port No. 1
of the operator.

Configure according to the network planning


Slave Port No. 2
of the operator.

5.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the G.SHDSL service in the TDM transparent mode is
shown in Figure 5-23.

Version: A/1 5-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-23 Configuration Flow of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

5.2.5 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the resistance value of the E1 link.

Procedure

1. Click the HDT8A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandE1 Configuration in the Menu Tree pane to bring


up the E1 Configuration tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-2.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-24.

5-30 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-24 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

5.2.6 Configuring Clock

Set the acquirement mode of the clock of the E1 link.

Procedure

1. Click the HDT8A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandClock Configuration in the Menu Tree pane to


bring up the Clock Configuration tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-2.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Version: A/1 5-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

5.2.7 Enabling an SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. The port fails in receiving and transmitting data if it is in the
disabled status.

Procedure

1. Click the HDT8A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Port Enable tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of ENABLEFLAG in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select Enable from the Start Value drop-down list and click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar, as shown in Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26 Enabling SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in TDM Transparent Mode

5-32 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-27.

Figure 5-27 The Completion of Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Mode

5.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters such as port mode, line encoding type and line
transmission mode of the SHDSL line profile.

Procedure

1. Click the management control card in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. Select Config CommandProfile ConfigSHDSL Line Profile from the


Menu Tree pane to bring up the SHDSL Line Profile.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add an
SHDSL line profile.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-2.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-28.

Version: A/1 5-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-28 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Mode

5.2.9 Binding an SHDSL Port to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind the set SHDSL line profile to the designated port. The port controls data stream
according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Click the HDT8A card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandSHDSL Port Binding Line Profile from the Menu
Tree pane to bring up the SHDSL Port Binding Line Profile tab.

3. Click Batch Modify in the toolbar to select the row of TEMPLATENAME in the
Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Select ShdslTDM from the drop-down menu of the Start Value item and keep
the default values for other parameters. Click Modify Selected Item in the
menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-29.

5-34 Version: A/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-29 Binding SHDSL Line Profile to SHDSL Port - G.SHDSL Service in TDM
Transparent Mode

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 The Completion of Binding the SHDSL Line Profile to the SHDSL Port for the G.
SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Version: A/1 5-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

5.2.10 Configuration Result

The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.

5-36 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

The following introduces how to configure the multicast service of the AN5006-20.

Common Configuration

Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the Proxy
Mode

Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the VDSL Card in the Controlled
Mode

Version: A/1 6-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6.1 Common Configuration

The following introduces the common configuration steps and methods of


provisioning the multicast services for the AN5006-20.

6.1.1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

The following introduces these configurations: Configures the uplink port VLAN of
the AN511606B for the object service traffic, so as to restrict the VLAN ID value
range of this service.

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select VLAN ConfigLocal VLANLocal End


Service VLAN to access the Local End Service VLAN tab.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure various parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Configuring the Local End Service VLAN

6.1.2 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

The following introduces how to configure the working mode when setting up the
multicast service on the AN5006-20.

6-2 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the AN511606B in the Object Tree pane
and select ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to
access the Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select IGMP ConfigIGMP Mode to access the IGMP
Mode tab.

3. Configure various parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

6.1.3 Configuring OLT Multicast Default VLAN

The following introduces how to configure the multicast VLAN information for an
OLT and designate a VLAN path for the multicast service.

Procedure

1. Click the active core switch card of the OLT in the Object Tree pane and select
ConfigurationService Config Management in the menu bar to access the
Service Config Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select IGMP ConfigIGMP VLAN to bring up the
IGMP VLAN tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-3.

Version: A/1 6-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-3 Configuring OLT Multicast Default VLAN

6.2 Example for Multicast Service Configuration


of the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode

The following introduces the multicast service configuration methods in the proxy
mode.

6.2.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64, VD32 or CASA card to start up the
multicast service in the proxy mode. In the following paragraphs the AD64 card is
used as an example. The configuration modes of the other cards are basically the
same as that of the AD64 card.

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including


joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol


message.

u For the proxy mode, the AD64 card is working in the snooping mode, whereas
the SCU card, as the proxy of the user interface card, manages the members of
the multicast group actively, so as to relieve the protocol burden of the uplink
device.

u For the snooping mode, both the AD64 and the SCU cards are working in the
snooping mode. As the configuration procedures are the same as those in the
proxy mode, except the multicast mode, examples are omitted here.

u Each AD64 card can provide up to 64 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each AD64 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.

6-4 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The VLAN ID added
into the uplink multicast protocol message by the SCU card must be within the
configured VLAN range of the uplink service.

6.2.2 Network Diagram

The network of the ADSL multicast service in the proxy mode is shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Network Diagram of the ADSL Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode

One set of AN5006-20 is connected with 64 IPTV subscribers, and the home
gateway adds and strips the VLAN tags. The VLAN is transparent to the AN5006-20.
The running processes of the uplink and downlink services are described as follows:

u In the uplink direction, the subscriber's data are added with the VLAN ID 200
via ASDL uplinked home gateway. The data are transmitted to the AN5006-20,
and then the AN5006-20 transmits the VLAN tag transparently and uplinks to
the IPTV server.

u In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20 transmits the downlink messages


transparently to the home gateway via the multicast protocol, and then the
home gateway strips the VLAN tag and forwards the data to the video
subscribers.

Version: A/1 6-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6.2.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card in the Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at user
side; the core switch card in Slot 5 serves as the uplink card at network side. The
PWRB card and FANB card are compulsory. The planning data are shown in
Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Planning Data of the Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


Service Name network planning of the iptv1
operator.

Configure according to the


Start VLAN ID network planning of the 200
operator.

Configure according to the


End VLAN ID network planning of the 200
operator.
Configuring uplink service
Configure according to the
parameters
number of the actually
Port No/Trunk Group ID 19:SFP1
used uplink port or the
TRUNK group.

Configure according to the


TAG/UNTAG network planning of the TAG
operator.

IPTV should be selected


Service Type IPTV
for multicast services.
Add-slot Mode Auto Add or Manual Add Auto Add
The slot number of the
Slot No. core switch card, using the 5
fixed slot 5.
Configure according to the
Disabling the uplink port Port No. number of the actually 1
multicast packet used uplink port.
suppression Select Multicast,
Packet Type corresponding to multicast Multicast
service.
Disables the multicast
Enable/disable Disable
packet suppression.

6-6 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Table 6-1 Planning Data of the Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Automatically assigned by
Service ID 1
the system

Configure this item


Service Name according to the operators iptv1
network planning.

Configure this item


Starting VLAN ID according to the operators 200
network planning.

Configure this item


Ending VLAN ID according to the operators 200
network planning.

Configure according to the


Port No. number of the actually GE1
used uplink port.

The VLAN tag operation


method of the uplink
service, including untag
Configuring uplink service and tag.
VLAN u In the untag mode, the
tags of the uplink
packets will be
stripped automatically
when they pass the
port and the packets
will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag untag form, while the tag
downlink untag
packets will be added
with designated tags
when they pass the
port.
u In the tag mode, the
tags of the uplink /
downlink data packets
will not be processed
when they pass the
port.

Version: A/1 6-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 6-1 Planning Data of the Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


Configuring the multicast Core switch card multicast
network planning of the Proxy Mode
mode mode
operator.

Configure this item


Configuring multicast proxy according to the operators
IGMP Proxy IP 10.25.10.1
IP address network planning. The IP
address of the AN5006-20.
Configure according to the
network planning of the
operator. The default
Default SVLAN ID 200
multicast SVLAN ID should
be in the range of the
Configuring multicast
uplink SVLAN.
default VLAN
Configure the default
multicast CVLAN ID
Default CVLAN ID according to the network -
planning of the operator.
Retain the default value.
The number of the slot
Slot No. actually used by the AD64 2
card.
The number of the port
Port No. actually used by the AD64 1 to 64
Port Service VLAN Config
card.
Service Type The actual service type Multicast
Configure the VLAN tag
CVLAN Mode processing mode of the Transparent
ADSL port according to the

6-8 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Table 6-1 Planning Data of the Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

network planning of the


operator.
u TAG: Configures a
VLAN tagging to the
received data.
u Translation:
Translates the original
VLAN ID to one
compliant with the
operator's rules.
u Transparent:
Transmits the
received data directly.

Configure the received


VLAN ID according to the
CVLAN ID 200
network planning of the
operator.

The number of the slot


Slot No. actually used by the AD64 2
card.
Enabling the ADSL Port The number of the port
Port No. actually used by the AD64 1 to 64
card.
ENABLEFLAG Port Enable Enable

6.2.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 6-5 for the configuration flowchart of the multicast service of the ADSL
card in the proxy mode.

Version: A/1 6-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-5 Flow for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode

6.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

6.2.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet


Suppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the uplink port, so as to avoid
suppression of the rate of the multicast messages.

6-10 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigBroadcast Storm


Suppression in the Menu Tree pane.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.2.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN of the management control card, so as to limit
the VLAN range of the designated service traffic via the uplink GE1 port.

Procedure

1. In the Object Tree pane, right-click the management control card, and select
Service Config Management.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigPort Config


Uplink Service Vlan.

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-7.

Version: A/1 6-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Proxy Mode

6.2.8 Configuring Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode when setting up the multicast service.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP Mode in the "Menu


Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 Configuring Proxy Multicast Mode

6.2.9 Configuring Multicast Proxy IP Address

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address is used
as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.

6-12 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP Proxy IP Address in


the "Menu Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address - Proxy Mode

6.2.10 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP VLAN in the "Menu


Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN - Proxy Mode

Version: A/1 6-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6.2.11 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the AD64 card.

Procedure

1. Right-click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane, and select Service Config
Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandPort Service VLAN Config in the Menu Tree


pane.

3. Click the expand button of AD64 in the left pane to display all 64 ports of the
AD64 card.

4. In the right-upper pane, click the PVC Index button to display all entries
according to the PVC index sequence. Press the mouse left key, and select the
64 ports whose PVC index is 0, as shown in Figure 6-11.

Figure 6-11 The Selection of Port with PVC Index 0

5. Click Add Port Service Vlan on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. In the Choose PVC Index dialog box that appears, click the expand button
next to AD64 to display 64 ports of the card. Select the AD64 check box to
select all 64 ports, as shown in Figure 6-12.

6-14 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Figure 6-12 The PVC Index Selection Dialog Box

7. Click OK to return to the Port Service VLAN Config window.

8. Right-click the first row of the lower right pane and select Batch Modify from
the shortcut menu.

9. In the "Batch Modify" dialog box that appears, click Service Type and select
multicast from the Start Value drop-down list. Keep the default settings of the
rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and all selected
service types will be set to multicast in a batch manner.

10. Click CVLAN mode and select Transparent from the Start Value drop-down
list. Keep the default settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected
Item on the toolbar and all selected CVLAN modes will be set to Transparent
in a batch manner.

11. Select QINQ VLAN ID and enter 200 in the Start Value. Keep the default
settings of the rest parameters. Click Modify Selected Item on the toolbar and
all selected CVLAN IDs will be set to 200.

12. Return to the Port Service VLAN Config window, and click Write To Device
on the toolbar to complete the configuration. See Figure 6-13.

Version: A/1 6-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-13 The Completion of Configuring a Port Service VLAN - Proxy Mode

6.2.12 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the port of the AD64 card. If the port is disabled, the user cannot configure
parameters on this port.

Procedure

1. Right-click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane, and select Service Config
Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the "Menu Tree" pane.

3. Click EditBatch Modify in the menu bar to access the Batch Modify dialog
box, and select the ENABLEFLAG row.

4. Select Enable from the Start Value drop-down list and click on the toolbar, as
shown in Figure 6-14.

6-16 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Figure 6-14 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner

5. In the Port Enable window, the ENABLEFLAG of all ports has been modified
to Enable status.

6. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15 Completion of Enabling ADSL Port

Version: A/1 6-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6.2.13 Configuration Result

After VLAN setting, 64 subscribers under the AD64 card in slot 2 can view the video
program with VLAN ID = 200.

6.2.13.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationOnline IGMP Groups


in the Menu Tree.

3. Select group addresses in the left pane and click Read from Device in the
toolbar to read the current online multicast group information, as shown in
Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

6.2.13.2 Viewing Online Group Information at a Specified Port

View the online multicast group information at port 1 of the AD64 card in slot 2 in the
current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

6-18 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationOnline IGMP Group


Information For Specific Port in Menu Tree.

3. In the left pane, double-click and type 2 in the Slot No. bar, and double-click
and type 1 in the Port No. bar.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information at the specified port. See Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 Viewing Online Group Information at a Specified Port in the Proxy Mode

6.2.13.3 Viewing the Manage Control Card's Multicast Address


Table

View the manage control card's multicast address table in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationMCU MC Address


Table in Menu Tree.

3. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the manage control card's
multicast address table. See Figure 6-18.

Version: A/1 6-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-18 Checking the Core Switch Cards Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6.2.13.4 Viewing the Line Card's Multicast Address Table

View the multicast address table of the AD64 card in slot 2 in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationLine Card Multicast


Address Table in the Menu Tree.

3. In the Slot No. column of the left pane, double-click and enter 2.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-19.

Figure 6-19 Checking the Line Cards Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode

6-20 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

6.3 Example for Multicast Service Configuration


of the VDSL Card in the Controlled Mode

The following introduces the multicast service configuration methods in the


controlled mode.

6.3.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64 or VD32 card to provision the multicast
service in the controllable mode. In the following paragraphs the VD32 card is used
as an example.

u For the controlled mode, the VD32 card is working in the controlled mode,
whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user interface card,
manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the programs.

u Each VD32 card can provide up to 32 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each VD32 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including


joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol


message.

u The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. Both the VLAN ID
added into the uplink multicast protocol message by the management control
card and the VLAN ID configured by the multicast group must be within the
configured VLAN range of the uplink service.

6.3.2 Network Diagram

The network of the VDSL multicast service in the controlled mode is shown in
Figure 6-20.

Version: A/1 6-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-20 Network Diagram of the VDSL Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

In the uplink direction, the user's untagged data are added with VLAN IDs 100 and
200 via VDSL uplinked home gateway. The data are then sent to the AN5006-20.
The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN tags, and then uplinks the data to
the IPTV server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits
the VLAN tags of the downlink data packets. After being stripped the VLAN tags by
the home gateway, the IPTV data are finally forwarded to the video users.

6.3.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card in the Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at user
side; the core switch card in Slot 5 serves as the uplink card at network side. The
PWRB card and FANB card are compulsory. The planning data are shown in
Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Planning Data of the Multicast Service (in the Controlled Mode)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


Service Name network planning of the iptv2
Configuring
operator.
uplink service
Configure according to the
parameters
Start VLAN ID network planning of the 100
operator.

6-22 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Table 6-2 Planning Data of the Multicast Service (in the Controlled Mode) (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


End VLAN ID network planning of the 200
operator.

Uplink port Configure according to the


number or number of the actually used
19:SFP1
TRUNK group uplink port or the TRUNK
number group.

Configure according to the


TAG/UNTAG network planning of the TAG
operator.

IPTV should be selected for


Service Type IPTV
multicast services.
Add-slot Mode Auto Add or Manual Add Auto Add
The number of the slot actually
Slot No. 2
used by the VD32 card.
Enabling the
The number of the port actually
VDSL Port Port No. 1 to 32
used by the VD32 card.

ENABLEFLAG Port Enable Enable


The slot number of the core
Slot No. switch card, using the fixed slot 5
5.
Disabling the
Configure according to the
Uplink Port
Port No. number of the actually used PON
Multicast
uplink port.
Packet
Select Multicast,
Suppression
Packet Type corresponding to multicast Multicast
service.
Enable/disable Broadcast Storm Suppression Disable
Automatically assigned by the
Service ID 1
system

Configure this item according


Configuring
Service Name to the operators network iptv2
uplink service
planning.
VLAN
Configure this item according
Starting VLAN
to the operators network 100
ID
planning.

Version: A/1 6-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 6-2 Planning Data of the Multicast Service (in the Controlled Mode) (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according


Ending VLAN
to the operators network 200
ID
planning.

Configure according to the


Port No. number of the actually used PON
uplink port.

Set the VLAN tag property of


the uplink service to untag or
tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the
tags of the uplink packets
will be stripped
automatically when they
pass the port and the
packets will be uplinked in
Port Tag/Untag the untag form, while the tag
downlink untag packets
will be added with
designated tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags
of the uplink / downlink
data packets will not be
processed when they
pass the port.

Configure this item according


Configuring the
IGMP Mode to the operators network Controlled mode
multicast mode
planning.

Configuring Configure this item according


multicast proxy IGMP Proxy IP to the operators network 10.26.10.1
IP address planning.

Configure according to the


Configuring network planning of the
Multicast
multicast operator. The default multicast 100
default VLAN
default VLAN VLAN ID should be in the
range of the uplink VLAN.

Configuring
Automatically assigned by the
multicast Profile ID 1
system.
profile

6-24 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Table 6-2 Planning Data of the Multicast Service (in the Controlled Mode) (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according


Profile Name to the operators network a
planning.

Configure this item according


Group Address to the operators network 226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
planning.

Configure according to the


Authority network planning of the Normal Normal Preview
operator.

The group address configured


Group Address 226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
in the multicast profile

Configure according to the


network planning of the
Group VLAN operator. The group SVLAN 100 200 100
should be in the range of the
uplink SVLAN.

Configure according to the


Preview Count
network planning of the - - 5
(Times)
operator.
Configuring
Configure according to the
multicast group
Preview Time network planning of the - - 10
parameters
operator.

Configure according to the


Preview Interval network planning of the - - 20
operator.

Configure according to the


Preview Reset network planning of the - 24
operator.

Configure according to the


Preview Total
network planning of the - - 50
Time
operator.

The number of the slot actually


Configuring Slot No. 2
used by the VD32 card.
multicast port
The number of the port actually
parameters Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

Version: A/1 6-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 6-2 Planning Data of the Multicast Service (in the Controlled Mode) (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


network planning of the
Control switch Controlled
operator. Select controlled
mode.
The profile name configured in
Multicast Profile a
the multicast profile

Configure according to the


Max Online network planning of the
32
Groups (Group) operator. Retain the default
value.
Configure according to the
Port Bandwidth network planning of the
0
(Kbit/b) operator. Retain the default
value.
Configure according to the
Fast leave network planning of the NON FAST LEAVE
operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 2
used by the VD32 card.

The number of the port actually


Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

Service Type The actual service type Multicast


Configure the VLAN tag
processing mode of the VDSL
port according to the network
planning of the operator.

Port Service u TAG: Configures a VLAN

VLAN Config tagging to the received


CVLAN Mode data. Transparent
u Translation: Translates the
original VLAN ID to one
compliant with the
operator's rules.
u Transparent: Transmits
the received data directly.

Configure the received VLAN


CVLAN ID ID according to the network 100, 200
planning of the operator.

6-26 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

6.3.4 Configuration Flow

The VD32 card of the AN5006-20 is used as the interface card at the subscriber
side. The core switch card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are compulsory.
The flowchart is shown in Figure 6-21.

Version: A/1 6-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-21 Flow for Multicast Service Configuration of the VDSL Card in the Controlled Mode

6-28 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

6.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

See Common Configuration for configuring uplink service parameters.

6.3.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet


Suppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the uplink port.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigBroadcast Storm


Suppression in the Menu Tree pane.

3. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.3.7 Configuring Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN of the management control card, so as to limit
the VLAN range of the designated service traffic via the uplink GE port.

Procedure

1. In the Object Tree pane, right-click the SCU card, and select Service Config
Management.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select ConfigData Service ConfigUplink


Service Vlan .

Version: A/1 6-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

3. Click the Append button on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
service VLAN.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Controlled Mode

6.3.8 Configuring Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode when setting up the multicast service.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config Command IGMP Param.Config IGMP Mode in the "Menu


Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Configuring Controlled Multicast Mode

6-30 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

6.3.9 Configuring Multicast Proxy IP Address

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address is used
as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP Proxy IP Address in


the "Menu Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-25.

Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address - Controllable Mode

6.3.10 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP VLAN in the "Menu


Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-26.

Version: A/1 6-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-26 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN - Controllable Mode

6.3.11 Configuring Multicast Profile

Configure the viewing authority of a specified multicast group.

Note:

The first row is the empty profile by default and should not be modified.
When configuring the IGMP Port Parameters, if the user port is not
required to be bound with the multicast profile, the empty profile should
be selected.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP Profile in the "Menu


Tree".

3. Click in the left pane, click Append on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Please
Input The Rows For Add: dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new
multicast profile.

4. Click in the right pane, click Append on the toolbar, and enter 3 in the Please
Input The Rows For Add: dialog box that appears. Click OK to add three
entries.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click "Create On Device" in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-27.

6-32 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Profile

6.3.12 Configure Multicast Group Parameters

Configure the multicast groups' basic parameters, including group SVLAN, preview
times, preview time, preview interval, etc.

Note:

Retain the default preview values of the multicast groups 226.0.1.2 and
226.0.1.2. Only when the multicast groups are in the preview mode can
the preview parameters become valid.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigIGMP Group Parameters


in the "Menu Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-28.

Version: A/1 6-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-28 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

6.3.13 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

Configure the multicast port parameters, including control switch, multicast profile,
maximum online groups and port bandwidth, etc.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandIGMP Param.ConfigMulticast Port


Parameters in the "Menu Tree".

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-29 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

6.3.14 Configuring a Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the VD32 card.

6-34 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Procedure

1. Right-click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigPort
VLAN Config from the shortcut menu that appears.

2. Click the expand button of VD32 in the left pane to display all 32 ports of the
VD32 card.

3. Click ports 1 and 2 in the pane respectively. Click the Add Port Service VLAN
button, and type 2 in the Please input added rows: dialog box, and click OK to
create two port service VLANs for each port.

4. Configure the parameters in the lower right pane according to the planning data
.

5. Click Write To Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30 The Completion of Configuring a Port Service VLAN in the Controlled Mode

6.3.15 Enabling the VDSL Port

Enable the port of the VD32 card. If the port is disabled, the user cannot configure
parameters on this port.

Procedure

1. Right-click the VD32 card in the Object Tree pane, and select Service Config
Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Config CommandPort Enable in the "Menu Tree" pane.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: A/1 6-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-31.

Figure 6-31 Completion of Enabling VDSL Port

6.3.16 Configuration Result

After VLAN setting, both video subscribers can normally view the two video
programs with IP addresses 226.0.1.1 and 226.0.1.2, but can only preview the
program whose IP address is 226.0.1.3.

6.3.16.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationOnline IGMP Groups


in the Menu Tree.

3. In the left pane, select group addresses 226.0.1.1 and 226.0.1.2 respectively
and click Read on Device on the toolbar to retrieve the current online multicast
group information. Two subscribers are viewing the two multicast programs
normally, as shown in Figure 6-32.

6-36 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

Figure 6-32 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal User

4. Select the group address 226.0.1.3 in the left pane and click Read from
Device on the toolbar to read the current online multicast group information.
Two subscribers previewing the multicast program, as shown in Figure 6-33.

Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview User

6.3.16.2 Viewing Online Group Information at a Specified Port

View the online multicast group information at port 1 of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the
current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationOnline IGMP Group


Information For Specific Port in Menu Tree.

3. In the left pane, double-click and type 3 in the Slot No. bar, and double-click
and type 1 in the Port No. bar.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information at the specified port. See Figure 6-34.

Version: A/1 6-37


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-34 Viewing Online Group Information at a Specified Port - Controllable Mode

6.3.16.3 Viewing the Manage Control Card's Multicast Address


Table

View the manage control card's multicast address table in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationMCU MC Address


Table in Menu Tree.

3. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the manage control card's
multicast address table. See Figure 6-35.

Figure 6-35 Checking the MCU Cards Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode

6-38 Version: A/1


6 Multicast Service Configuration

6.3.16.4 Viewing the Line Card's Multicast Address Table

View the multicast address table of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Right-click the management control card in the Object Tree pane, and select
Service Config Management from the shortcut menu.

2. Select Get InformationIGMP Param. InformationLine Card Multicast


Address Table in the Menu Tree.

3. In the Slot No. column of the left pane, double-click and enter 3.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-36.

Figure 6-36 Checking the Line Cards Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode

Version: A/1 6-39


7 Upgrading Card Software

The following introduces the upgrading procedure of the card software on the
AN5006-20.

Precaution

Upgrading the Manage Control Card

Upgrading the Line Card

Version: A/1 7-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

7.1 Precaution

The operators are advised to follow the instructions given below to upgrade the
cards, so as to minimize the upgrade impact on the service.

u Upgrade is strongly advised to carry out at night when service traffic is at a


relatively low volume.

u To ensure the connection between the management VLAN port of the AN5006-
20 and the FTP server is normal, and the IP address of this management VLAN
and that of the FTP server are within the same subnet, the user can test the
connectivity with the equipment using ping command on the FTP server before
upgrade operations.

u Users should save the current software version before the upgrade in case the
upgrade fails or the new version has encountered a problem.

u The file type used for the upgrade should match the card type; otherwise the
upgrade may fail.

u Upgrade the service interface card first and then the manage control card, if
both types need upgrade.

7.2 Upgrading the Manage Control Card

The following introduces procedures and the method of upgrading the AN5006-20
management control card.

7.2.1 Upgrade Rule

The management control card will be reset after upgraded. Therefore, it is


necessary to save the current configuration to the management control card's flash
and back up the current configuration and the system software to the FTP server.

7.2.2 Planning Data

In the following the MCU-EPON card upgrade is used as an example.

The planning data of upgrading the core switch card are shown in Table 7-1.

7-2 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

Table 7-1 Planning Data of Upgrading the Core Switch Card

Item Description Example

Downloaded file type Core switch card software GSW


Configure according to the
FTP Server IP 10.78.20.122
actual conditions.
Configure according to the
FTP server username 1
actual conditions.
Configure according to the
FTP server password 1
actual conditions.
The file name includes no
The exported file name 10.78.20.122_0121
more than 20 characters.
The file name includes no
The backup file name backup
more than 20 characters.
The file name of the core The file name includes no
MCUEPON_RP0104
switch card upgrade software. more than 20 characters.

7.2.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow to upgrade the manage control card is shown in Figure 7-1.

Version: A/1 7-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card

7.2.4 Saving Configuration to Flash

The user can save the configuration into the flash in case the upgrade fails or the
new version has encountered a problem.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandSave Config To Flash in the Menu Tree pane to


bring up the Sending Commands... dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-2.

7-4 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

Figure 7-2 Saving Configuration to Flash

3. Click OK to save the configuration to Flash.

4. Click Close to close the Sending Commands... dialog box.

7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File

Back up all the current configuration files in case the upgrade fails or the new
version has encountered a problem.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandExport Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring up


the Export Config File dialog box.

3. Configure parameters according to the planning data, as shown in Figure 7-3.

Version: A/1 7-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration File

4. The system prompts Exporting is successful! after users click Export Config
File. Click OK to complete exporting files.

7.2.6 Backing up the System Software

The system can restore to the software status before upgrading if the upgrade fails
or the version failure occurs.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandBackup Software in the Menu Tree pane to bring


up the Backup Software dialog box.

3. Configure parameters according to the planning data, as shown in Figure 7-4.

7-6 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software

4. Click Backup Software to complete the backing-up operations.

7.2.7 Upgrading the Core Switch Card Software

The following introduces the upgrade method of the core switch card software.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandUpgrade Software in the Menu Tree pane to


bring up the Upgrade Software dialog box.

3. Configure parameters according to the planning data, as shown in Figure 7-5.

Version: A/1 7-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Core Switch Card Software

4. Click the Upgrade Software button to start the upgrading.

5. Wait until the system gives the prompt information, as shown in Figure 7-6.

7-8 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

Figure 7-6 Upgrading the Core Switch Card Software Successfully

6. Click OK to reset the core switch card.

7.2.8 Resetting the Manage Control Card

Restart the manage control card, so as to make the upgrade configuration valid.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandReboot in the Menu Tree to bring up the Reboot


tab.

3. Double-click Slot No. and select reset core card from the drop-down list.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to reset the manage control card, as
shown in Figure 7-7.

Version: A/1 7-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 7-7 Rebooting the Management Control Card

7.2.9 Checking the Core Switch Card Software Version

Check whether the software version of the core switch card is correct after upgrade.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Get InformationSystem Version in Menu Tree pane to bring up the


System Version tab.

3. Check whether the software version of the core switch card in Slot 5 is correct,
as shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 Checking the Core Switch Card Software Version

7.3 Upgrading the Line Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the AN5006-20s line card.

7-10 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

7.3.1 Upgrade Rule

Upgrading the line card software includes upgrading the softwares of the POTS
card, ADSL interface card and VDSL interface card.

u The cards with the same type can be upgraded in a batch manner.

u The upgrade procedures of the POTS card / ADSL interface card / VDSL
interface card are the same.

u The downloaded file types of upgrading the POTS card / ADSL interface card /
VDSL interface card are different. See Table 7-2 for the correspondence
relationships between "Upgrade Object" and "Download File Type".

Table 7-2 Correspondence Relationships between Upgrade Object and Download File Type

Upgrade Object Download file type

POTS POTS64 Software


POTS32 POTS32 Software
VD32 AD32 Software
AD64 AD64 Software
VD32 VD32 Software
CASA CASA
HDT8A HDT8A
HD32A HD32A

7.3.2 Planning Data

Take upgrading the software of the AD64 card in slots 2 and 4 for example. See
Table 7-3 for the planning data.

Table 7-3 Planning Data of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card

Item Description Example

Downloaded file type AD64 Software AD64 Software


Configure according to the actual
FTP Server IP 10.78.20.122
conditions.
Configure according to the actual
FTP server username 1
conditions.

Version: A/1 7-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 7-3 Planning Data of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the actual


FTP server password 1
conditions.
Configure according to the actual
File name conditions. The file name should ADSL_RP0104
include no more than 20 characters.

7.3.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the ADSL interface card software is shown in Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandBatch Upgrade Line Card in the Menu Tree


pane to bring up the Batch Upgrade Line Card dialog box.

3. Configure parameters according to the planning data in Table 7-3.

7-12 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

1) Select two AD64 cards in the upgrade object list box.

2) Select "30 sec." from the "Refresh Time" drop-down list.

3) Click Refresh Timer and the upgrade status and process will be displayed
in the right pane of the dialog box. You can also click Refresh Now to
obtain the upgrade information.

4. Click Upgrade Software to start the upgrade, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch Manner

5. The system prompt Please reboot the object upgraded to make it work
appears after the upgrade is complete and click OK.

Version: A/1 7-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandReboot in the Menu Tree to bring up the Reboot


tab.

3. Double-click Slot No and select the slot where the upgraded ADSL interface
card is located from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

4. Click Create On Device on the toolbar and the system will prompt Are You
Sure To Send All Data To Device? Click Cancle To Give Up. Click Cancel if
not. Click OK in the alert box to reset the ADSL interface card in the designated
slot to valide the upgrade program.

5. Repeat Step 3 to 4 to reset the upgraded ADSL interface card in slot 4.

7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface


Card

Procedure

1. Click the AD64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Get InformationCard Version in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the
Card Version tab.

3. Check whether the software version of the upgraded ADSL interface card is
correct, as shown in Figure 7-12.

7-14 Version: A/1


7 Upgrading Card Software

Figure 7-12 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card

Version: A/1 7-15


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

The following introduces differences between the AN5006-20 manual link


aggregation mode and the static LACP aggregation mode and the configure method
of the two link aggregations.

Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode

Example of Configuring Static LACP Aggregation Mode

Version: A/1 8-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

8.1 Configuration Example of Manual


Aggregation Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of the manual aggregation mode.

8.1.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 supports the manual link aggregation mode. In this mode, the
LACP is not used, and the user adds the link aggregation member ports manually to
the LAG.

u The aggregation mode of the AN5006-20 can be either manual or static LACP.
Users only need to configure one mode.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups. The member ports of the
two groups are different Ethernet ports of the same core switch card.

u Member ports in one aggregation group can be 0 to 2.

8.1.2 Network Diagram

Taking the MCU-EPON card as an example, see Figure 8-1 for the manual
aggregation network diagram.

8-2 Version: A/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network

8.1.3 Planning Data

See Table 8-1 for the planning data of configuring the manual aggregation mode.

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Configuring the Manual Aggregation Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the actually used core switch


Slot No. 5
card
The slot number of the actually used core switch
Port No. GE1 GE2
card

Configuring the Auto- Enables or disables the auto-negotiation of the


Enable
properties of the negotiation Ethernet port.

Ethernet ports of The Ethernet port and the GE port support rates of
Rate 1000M
the core switch 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.
card Sets the duplex mode of the Ethernet port. The
Duplex mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex Full duplex
mode. Full-duplex mode is selected by default.

Enables or disables the flow control function of the


Flow control Disable
Ethernet port. Disabled by default.

Version: A/1 8-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Configuring the Manual Aggregation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Port address Enables or disables the Ethernet port address


Enable
learning learning function. Enabled by default.

Enables or disables the port priority function.


Port priority Enable
Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the Ethernet port,


Port priority
ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while 0 0
value
is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.

The interface mode of the Ethernet port; includes


SerDes and SGMII. The default value is SerDes.
When the Ethernet port uses the optical module or
Interface mode forced GE electrical module, the SerDes mode is SerDes
configured. When the Ethernet port uses the
10/100/1000Mbps electrical mode, the SMGII mode
is configured.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate


Group ID 1
Configuring link groups; automatically generated by the system.
aggregation Configure the link aggregation mode of the
groups Mode AN5006-20 according to the network planning of Manual Trunking
the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate


Group ID 1
Configuring the groups; automatically generated by the system.
aggregation port Member Port Add the group member port to the LAG manually
GE1 GE2
Number according to the network planning of the operator.

8.1.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 8-2 for the configuration flow of the manual aggregation.

8-4 Version: A/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Figure 8-2 Configuration Flow of Manual Aggregation

8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Core Switch


Card

Configure the properties of the GE1 and GE2 ports of the core switch card.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandData Service


ConfigurationPort ConfigurationGE Port to open the GE Port tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-3.

Version: A/1 8-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Core Switch Card - Manual Aggregation

8.1.6 Configuring Aggregation Mode

Configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation group of the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigTrunk Config


Aggregation Group in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the Aggregation
Group tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation

8-6 Version: A/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.1.7 Configuring Aggregation Port

Set the GE1 and GE2 ports of the core switch card to the member ports of the
manual aggregation group.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigTrunk Config


Aggregation Port Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the Aggregation
Port Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Port - Manual Aggregation

8.1.8 Configuration Result

The traffic will achieve load sharing automatically on the uplink ports GE1 and GE2
of the link aggregation group. If one physical link is faulty, the traffic can
automatically switch to the other links of the aggregation group.

8.2 Example of Configuring Static LACP


Aggregation Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of static LACP aggregation mode.

Version: A/1 8-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

8.2.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 supports the static LACP aggregation mode. The equipment uses
the LACP and performs protocol interaction with the uplink switch. It determines the
ports of link aggregation by comparing system priorities, port priorities and operation
key.

u The aggregation mode of the AN5006-20 can be either manual or static LACP.
Users only need to configure one mode.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups. The member ports of the
two groups are different Ethernet ports of the same core switch card.

u Member ports in one aggregation group can be 0 to 2.

8.2.2 Network Diagram

Taking the MCU-EPON card as an example, see Figure 8-6 for the static LACP
aggregation network diagram.

Figure 8-6 Static LACP Aggregation Network

8-8 Version: A/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.3 Planning Data

See Table 8-2 for the planning data of configuring the static LACP aggregation
mode.

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Static LACP Aggregation Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the actually used


Slot No. 5
core switch card
The slot number of the actually used
Port No. GE1 GE2
core switch card
Enables or disables the auto-
Auto-negotiation Enable
negotiation of the Ethernet port.

The Ethernet port and the GE port


Rate support rates of 10Mbps, 100Mbps 1000M
and 1000Mbps.

Sets the duplex mode of the Ethernet


port. The mode includes full duplex
Configuring the Duplex Full duplex
mode and half duplex mode. Full-
properties of the
duplex mode is selected by default.
Ethernet ports of
Enables or disables the flow control
the core switch
Flow control function of the Ethernet port. Disabled Disable
card
by default.

Enables or disables the Ethernet port


Port address
address learning function. Enabled by Enable
learning
default.
Enables or disables the port priority
Port priority Enable
function. Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the


Ethernet port, ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is
Port priority value the highest priority while 0 is the 0
lowest priority. The default setting is
0.

Version: A/1 8-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Static LACP Aggregation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The interface mode of the Ethernet


port; includes SerDes and SGMII.
The default value is SerDes. When
the Ethernet port uses the optical
Interface mode module or forced GE electrical SerDes
module, the SerDes mode is
configured. When the Ethernet port
uses the 10/100/1000Mbps electrical
mode, the SMGII mode is configured.

LACP switch Enables the static LACP switch. Enable


Configure the system priority of the
Configuring
System priority AN5006-20 according to the network 32768
LACP global
planning of the operator.
parameters
The CPU MAC address of the
System ID 00-0a-c2-88-77-44
AN5006-20
Configure the port number of the link
Port No. aggregation according to the network GE1 GE2
planning of the operator.
Configuring
Port priority The default setting is 32768. 32768
LACP port
Operation key The default setting is 0. 1
parameters
Configure the port timer type
Timer according to the network planning of Long Timeout
the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link


Group ID aggregate groups; automatically 1
Configuring link
generated by the system.
aggregation
Configure the link aggregation mode
groups
Mode of the AN5006-20 according to the Static LACP
network planning of the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link


aggregate groups; the group ID is
Group ID 1
automatically generated by the
Configuring
system.
aggregation port
Add the group member GE port to the
Member Port
LAG manually according to the GE1 GE2
Number
network planning of the operator.

8-10 Version: A/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 8-7 for the configuration flow of the static LACP aggregation.

Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Core Switch


Card

Configure the properties of the GE1 and GE2 ports of the core switch card.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandData Service


ConfigurationPort ConfigurationGE Port to open the GE Port tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: A/1 8-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Core Switch Card Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

Configure the LACP function of the AN5006-20. When the LACP function is enabled,
the equipment will run the LACP, perform protocol interaction with the uplink switch
and determine the link aggregation ports.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigTrunk ConfigLACP


Global Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the LACP Global Config
tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

8.2.7 Configuring LACP Port Parameters

Configure the LACP parameters of the aggregation ports.

8-12 Version: A/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigTrunk ConfigLACP Port


Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the LACP Port Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-10 Configuring LACP Port Parameters

8.2.8 Configuring Aggregation Mode

Configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation group of the equipment.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigTrunk Config


Aggregation Group in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the Aggregation
Group tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-11.

Version: A/1 8-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.9 Configuring Aggregation Port

Set the GE1 and GE2 ports of the core switch card to the member ports of the static
LACP aggregation group.

Procedure

1. Click the core switch card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Config CommandData Service ConfigTrunk Config


Aggregation Port Config in the Menu Tree pane to bring up the Aggregation
Port Config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Port - Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.10 Configuration Result

The GE1 and GE2 uplink ports are added to the static LACP aggregation group
manually. And the equipment runs the LACP, performs protocol interaction with the
uplink switch and determines the link aggregation ports.

8-14 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and
Environment Monitoring

The following introduces the method of configuring power supply and environment
monitoring for the AN5006-20.

Configuring Environment Monitoring

Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters

Configuring the Charging Mode

Rebooting the HCU-20 Card

Configuring the Enabling Status of the Rectifier Module

Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing the Current Alarm of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card

Version: A/1 9-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure the environment monitoring.

9.1.1 Configuration Rule

u The HCU-20 card or the port on the HCU-20 card can be bound to only one
threshold profile, while one threshold profile can be bound to multiple ports.

u The alarms can be classified into status alarms and threshold alarms.

4 The status alarms are the alarms reported by the HCU-20 card when the
system is abnormal.

4 The threshold alarms are the alarms reported by the system after the
system detects that the performance value is beyond the threshold value
set in the threshold profile.

u Table 9-1 shows the relationship between the alarm code and the alarm report
threshold & default value / the alarm eliminating threshold & default value.

Table 9-1 Relationship between the Alarm Code and the Parameters of Alarm Report
Threshold / Alarm Eliminating Threshold

Parameter Setting of Alarm Parameter Setting of Alarm


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Report Threshold Eliminating Threshold

Threshold
HUM_DOWN [0.00,19.90], default value: 0.00 [0.00,19.90], default value: 0.00 %RH
alarm
Threshold
TEM_DOWN [0.00,19.90], default value: 0.00 [0.00,19.90], default value: 0.00
alarm
Threshold [50.00,109.90], default value: [50.00,109.90], default value: 90.
HUM_OVER %RH
alarm 90.00 00
Threshold [35.00,70.00], default value: 55.
TEM_OVER [35.00,70.00], default value: 55.00
alarm 00
Threshold [230.00,300.00], default value: [230.00,300.00], default value:
ACVOLOVER V
alarm 280.00 280.00
Threshold [130.00,220.00], default value: [130.00,220.00], default value:
ACVOLDOWN V
alarm 170.00 170.00
Threshold [55.00,58.50], default value: 57.
DCVOLOVER [55.00,58.50], default value: 57.00 V
alarm 00
Threshold [42.00,50.00], default value: 45.
DCVOLDOWN [42.00,50.00], default value: 45.00 V
alarm 00

9-2 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-1 Relationship between the Alarm Code and the Parameters of Alarm Report
Threshold / Alarm Eliminating Threshold (Continued)

Parameter Setting of Alarm Parameter Setting of Alarm


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Report Threshold Eliminating Threshold

Threshold [10.00,39.90], default value: 30.


OVERCURRE [10.00,39.90], default value: 30.00 A
alarm 00
Threshold [50.00,69.90], default value: 59.
BDCVLOVER [50.00,69.90], default value: 59.00 V
alarm 00
Threshold [43.00,49.00], default value: 45.
BDCVLDOWN [43.00,49.00], default value: 45.00 V
alarm 00
Threshold [40.00,90.00], default value: 80.
RETEMOVER [40.00,90.00], default value: 80.00
alarm 00
BATTERY_
TEMPERA-
Threshold [40.00,89.90], default value: 60.
TURE_OVER_ [40.00,89.90], default value: 60.00
alarm 00
THRESHOLD_
ALARM
Lightning
Status
arrester - - -
alarm
breaking

Status
Fire alarm - - -
alarm
Status
Access control - - -
alarm
Battery fuse Status
- - -
breaking alarm
Load fuse Status
- - -
breaking alarm
AC circuit Status
- - -
breaker enable alarm
Rectifier Status
- - -
module alarm alarm
Status
Fan alarm - - -
alarm
Status
Heat alarm - - -
alarm
Status
Vibration - - -
alarm
Infrared Status
- - -
detection alarm alarm

Version: A/1 9-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 9-1 Relationship between the Alarm Code and the Parameters of Alarm Report
Threshold / Alarm Eliminating Threshold (Continued)

Parameter Setting of Alarm Parameter Setting of Alarm


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Report Threshold Eliminating Threshold

Status
Flood - - -
alarm
Status
Smoke - - -
alarm
Air-conditioner Status
- - -
alarm alarm
AC power Status
- - -
failure alarm

9.1.2 Planning Data

The planning data are shown in Table 9-2. The following takes binding the threshold
profile to the HCU-20 card as an example.

Table 9-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance

Item Description Example

Profile ID Read-only item. -


Configure according to the actual conditions. The maximum
Profile Name length: 20 characters. Allowed characters: 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z test1
and underline.
Configure according to the network planning of the operator.
Includes card and card port. When the value of object class is
Configuring
unspecified, the object type is empty; if the value is other one,
threshold Object Class Board
the object type is that of the corresponding class. The options
configuration
for the equipment power and environment monitoring
profile
configuration include local card and local card ports.

Configure according to the actual conditions.


If the Object Class is set to Board, set the Object Type to
Object Type HCU-20; HCU-20
If the Object Class is set to Port, set the Object Type to LINE-
20.

9-4 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network planning of the operator.


If the Object Class is set to Board, the alarm code can be set to
HUM_DOWN, TEM_DOWN, ACVOLOVER, ACVOLDOWN,
DCVOLOVER, DCVOLDOWN, HUM_OVER, TEM_OVER, etc. ACVO-
Alarm Code
If the "Object Class" is set to Port, the alarm code can be set to LOVER
OVERCURRE, BDCVLOVER, BDCVLDOWN, RETEMOVER,
BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_OVER_THRESHOLD_ALARM,
etc.
Configure according to the network planning of the operator.
Either Open or Close can be selected.
AlarmThre- If Open is selected, the ANM2000 will issue the threshold profile
Open
sholdSwitch parameters set by the user to the equipment.
If Close is selected, the ANM2000 will issue the default
threshold profile configuration to the equipment.

If the alarm indicates an overhigh performance item, the


ANM2000 will prompt the alarm when the performance item
value on the HCU-20 card or the port of the HCU-20 card is
AlarmReport- higher than the threshold value.
280.00
Threshold If the alarm indicates an overlow performance item, the
ANM2000 will prompt the alarm when the performance item
value on the HCU-20 card or the port of the HCU-20 card is
lower than the threshold value.
AlarmReport- Read-only item. The alarm report threshold should be set to be [230.00,300.
ThresholdRange within the alarm report threshold range. 00]

If the alarm indicates an overhigh performance item, the


ANM2000 will end alarm and display the end time when the
performance item value on the HCU-20 card or the port of the
HCU-20 card is lower than the threshold value. The threshold
value should be no more than the report threshold value.
If the alarm indicates an overlow performance item, the
ANM2000 will eliminate the alarm prompt when the performance
ClearingAlarm- item value on the HCU-20 card or the port of the HCU-20 card is
280.00
Threshold higher than the threshold value. The threshold value should be
higher than the report threshold value.
If the alarm report threshold is the same as the eliminating
threshold, the alarm has only one threshold value. If the alarm
indicates an overhigh performance item, the alarm will be
eliminated when the item is lower than the threshold; if the alarm
indicates an overlow performance item, the alarm will be
eliminated when the item is higher than the threshold.

Version: A/1 9-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 9-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Item Description Example

ClearingAlarm- Read-only item. The clearing alarm threshold should be set to [230.00,300.
ThresholdRange be within the clearing alarm threshold range. 00]

Object Name Select the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card. HCU-20
Threshold- The pre-set threshold profile name. For the bound threshold
ProfileBind Profile Name profile, users can select Unbind in the drop-down list to unbind test1
the profile from the HCU-20 card or port.

9.1.3 Configuration Flow

Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance

9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile

This command is used to configure the alarm code of the threshold profile, and
eliminate and report the threshold value. The threshold alarm can be performed by
binding the profile to the card or port.

Note:

The bound threshold profile cannot be deleted directly unless being


unbound first.

9-6 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandThreshold Profile and


BindThreshold Profile to access the Threshold Profile tab.

3. Click the blank area on the left part of the window, then click Append on the
toolbar, and enter 1 in the Please Input The Rows For Add: dialog box that
appears. Click OK.

4. Click the blank area on the right part of the window, then click Append on the
toolbar, and enter 1 in the Please Input The Rows For Add dialog box that
appears. Click OK.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile

This command is used to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card or the port
on the HCU-20 card, so as to perform the threshold alarm. The following takes
binding the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an example.

Procedure

1. Click the system in the Object Tree pane and select ConfigurationService
Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 9-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. In the Menu Tree pane, select Config CommandPerformance Threshold


Profile and BindPerformance Threshold Profile Binding to access the
Performance Threshold Profile Binding tab.

3. In the Local Object pane at the left side, select the HCU-20 card, and select
test1 in the drop-down list of the profile name.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9.1.6 Configuration Result

A threshold profile in which the alarm code is overhigh AC voltage is configured and
it is bound with the HCU-20 card. When the AC voltage of the card is higher than the
threshold value, the ANM2000 will prompt the alarm; when the AC voltage is lower
than the threshold value, the alarm will be eliminated.

9.2 Configuring Environment Monitoring


Parameters

Configure the power system parameters of the HCU-20 card to facilitate the normal
power system operation and ensure the reliability of power supply. The planning
data for configuring the parameters of environment monitoring are shown in
Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Item Description Example

Read only. The HCU-20 is managed as a


Configuring the Slot No. specific card on the ANM2000, whose slot 801
parameters of number is 801 fixedly.
environment Configure according to the planning of the
Batteryfill back
monitoring operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
coefficient value
and the default value is 0.0.

9-8 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-3 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the planning of the


batteryfill value operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
and the default value is 0.0.
Configure according to the planning of the
batteryfill limit_current
operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to 999.0, 8.0
value
and the default value is 8.0 (unit: A).

Configure according to the planning of the


batteryfill cycle value operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Configure according to the planning of the


batteryfill time value operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Configure according to the planning of the


battery_fill time
operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
stoptime
and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Temperature_ Configure according to the planning of the


compensate_ operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 200.0, 0.0
coefficient and the default value is 0.0.
Configure according to the planning of the
Temperature Batteryfill
operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to 30.0, 25.0
Basic
and the default value is 25.0 (unit: ).

Configure according to the planning of the


Volt Fill Adjust Value operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
and the default value is 0.0.
Configure according to the planning of the
Temperature Fill Adjust
operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 999.0, 0.0
Value
and the default value is 0.0.
Configure according to the planning of the
Communt float charge
operator. The value ranges from 45.0 to 57.0, 54.0
volt
and the default value is 54.0 (unit: V).

Configure according to the planning of the


Communt equal
operator. The value ranges from 52.0 to 58.5, 55.0
charge volt
and the default value is 55.0 (unit: V).

Configure according to the planning of the


Communt num operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0,12, 2
and the default value is 2 (unit: Channel).

Version: A/1 9-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 9-3 Planning Data of Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the planning of the


Battery Capacity operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to 999.0, 100.0
and the default value is 100.0 (unit: AH).

Configure according to the planning of the


Sound Alarm Switch operator. The options include "Enable" and Disable
"Disable".
Configure according to the planning of the
Battery switch volt operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to 47.0, Disable
and the default value is 43.0 (unit: V).

Configure according to the planning of the


Load switch volt operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to 50.0, 45.0
and the default value is 45.0 (unit: V).

Configure according to the planning of the


Communt limit_current
operator. The value ranges from 2.0 to 50.0, 11.0
value
and the default value is 11.0 (unit: A).

Configure according to the planning of the


Discharge turn EQ
operator. The value ranges from 43.0 to 51.0, 48.0
voltage
and the default value is 48.0 (unit: V).

Configure according to the planning of the


Discharge turn EQ
operator. The value ranges from 30.0 to 60.0, 30.0
time
and the default value is 30.0 (unit: min).

Configure according to the planning of the


Discharge turn EQ
operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to 90.0, 60.0
capacity
and the default value is 60.0 (unit: %).

Procedure

1. Click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select ConfigHCU para config in the Menu Tree pane and select HCU para
config tab.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 9-4.

9-10 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode

Configure the charging mode for the storage battery using the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandCharging mode in the Menu Tree to bring up the


Charging mode tab.

3. In the the drop-down list of Charging mode, select float charge or equal
charging according to the current condition of the storage battery.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode

9.4 Rebooting the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces the procedures of rebooting the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 9-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Control CommandReboot in the Menu Tree to bring up the Reboot


tab.

3. Select the slot 801 where the HCU-20 card to be rebooted is located in the
drop-down list of Slot No.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

9.5 Configuring the Enabling Status of the


Rectifier Module

The following introduces the procedures of enabling the rectifier module.

Procedure

1. Click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control CommandRectifier module enable in the Menu Tree pane


to bring up the Rectifier module enable tab.

3. Enter "1" in the text box of moduleNo, and select Enable in the drop-down list
of Enable.

4. Click Create On Device in the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Configuring the Enabling Status of the Rectifier Module

9-12 Version: A/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-


20 Card

The following introduces the procedure to view the instant performance of the HCU-
20 card.

Procedure

1. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane, and select Instant
Performance in the shortcut menu to open the FiberHome Anms: Instant
Performance tab, as shown in Figure 9-8.

Figure 9-8 Viewing Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card

9.7 Viewing the Current Alarm of the HCU-20


Card

The following introduces the procedure to view the current alarms of the HCU-20
card.

Procedure

1. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane, and select Current
Alarm in the shortcut menu to open the FiberHome Anms: Current Alarm tab,
as shown in Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9 Viewing Current Alarm of the HCU-20 Card

Version: A/1 9-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20


Card

The following introduces the procedure to view the alarm history of the HCU-20
card.

Procedure

1. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Object Tree pane, and select Alarm
History in the shortcut menu to open the FiberHome Anms: Alarm History
tab, as shown in Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-10 Viewing Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card

9-14 Version: A/1


10 Test Function

The following introduces subscriber line test and Ping test functions of the AN5006-
20.

Subscriber Internal Line Test

Subscriber External Line Test

Ping Test

Version: A/1 10-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test

The following introduces the methods of the subscriber internal line test.

10.1.1 Test Rule

The test type can be Force test or No Force test. When Force is selected, no matter
the subscriber is in conversation, this test will be performed. When No Force is
selected, the test will not be performed if the subscriber is in conversation. Normally
No Force test is recommended.

10.1.2 Signal Flow

The signal flow of the subscriber internal line test is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The procedure of the subscriber internal line test is described as follows:

1. The ANM2000 delivers the internal test command to the manage control card.

2. The manage control card receives the test command from the ANM2000,
checks the command parameters, including the parameter range, and whether
the line card is present and it is the POTS / CASA card. If the check is passed,
the test command is sent to the corresponding line card and meanwhile the
manage control card gives a feedback to the ANM2000 that the test command
is successfully delivered.

3. When the line card receives the test command, it performs the line test. Once it
completes a port test, the line card will report to the manage control card that
the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10.1.3 Test Flow

The subscriber internal line test flow is shown in Figure 10-2.

10-2 Version: A/1


10 Test Function

Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.4 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test

The internal line test can be used to check whether the POTS card is normal and
facilitate fault isolation. Here we take port 1 of the POTS64 card in slot 1 as an
example.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control Commandsubscriber line test in the Menu Tree to bring up


the subscriber line test tab.

3. Click the Append button in the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add:
dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
configuration entry.

4. Double-click the Test Mode field and select InLine Test from the drop-down
list.

5. Double-click the Test Type field and select no force test from the drop-down
list.

Version: A/1 10-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6. Click the Create on Device button in the toolbar to apply the configuration to
the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-3.

Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

Check the subscriber internal line test result.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Get InformationInLine Test in the Menu Tree to bring up the InLine
Test tab.

3. In the Config Object pane, click Set Object as Condition, select POTS64[1],
and then select port 1. The equipment reads the configuration, as shown in
Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

10-4 Version: A/1


10 Test Function

10.1.6 Test Result

Test State includes the following three statuses:

u Completed: The test is completed.

u Testing: The test is started but not completed.

u Wait for: The ANM2000 has not delivered the test command yet.

Test Result includes the following two statuses:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test failed. In this case, Refuse Reason may be the port being
tested or occupied.

The parameters like Signal Tone State, Feeder Voltage State, and Loop Current
State are Normal or Abnormal.

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test

The following introduces the methods of the subscriber external line test.

10.2.1 Test Rule

The test type can be Force test or No Force test. When Force is selected, no matter
the subscriber is in conversation, this test will be performed. When No Force is
selected, the test will not be performed if the subscriber is in conversation. Normally
No Force test is recommended.

10.2.2 Signal Flow

The signal flow of the subscriber external line test is shown in Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test

The procedure of the subscriber external line test is described as follows:

Version: A/1 10-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

1. The ANM2000 delivers the external line test command to the manage control
card.

2. The manage control card receives the test command from the ANM2000,
checks the command parameters, including the parameter range, and whether
the line card is present and it is the POTS / CASA card. If the check is passed,
the test command is sent to the corresponding line card and meanwhile the
manage control card gives a feedback to the ANM2000 that the test command
is successfully delivered.

3. When the line card receives the test command, it performs the line test. Once it
completes a port test, the line card will report to the manage control card that
the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10.2.3 Test Flow

The subscriber external line test flow is shown in Figure 10-6.

Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.4 Configuring Subscriber External Line Test

The external line test can be used to check whether the POTS card is normal and
facilitate fault isolation. Here we take port 1 of the POTS64 card in slot 1 as an
example.

10-6 Version: A/1


10 Test Function

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

2. Select Control Commandsubscriber line test in the Menu Tree to bring up


the subscriber line test tab.

3. Click the Append button in the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add:
dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
configuration entry.

4. Double-click the Test Mode field and select OutLine Test from the drop-down
list.

5. Double-click the Test Type field and select no force test from the drop-down
list.

6. Click the Create on Device button in the toolbar to apply the configuration to
the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.5 Checking the External Line Test Result

Check the 112 external line test result.

Procedure

1. Click the POTS64 card in the Object Tree pane and select Configuration
Service Config Management in the menu bar to access the Service Config
Management window.

Version: A/1 10-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Get InformationOutLine Test in the Menu Tree to bring up the


OutLine Test tab.

3. In the Config Object pane, click Set Object as Condition, select POTS64[1],
and then select port 1. The equipment reads the configuration, as shown in
Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8 Checking the External Line Test Result

10.2.6 Test Result

Test State includes the following three statuses:

u Completed: The test is completed.

u Testing: The test is started but not completed.

u Wait for: The ANM2000 has not delivered the test command yet.

Test Result includes the following two statuses:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test failed. In this case, Refuse Reason may be the port being
tested or occupied.

Port State shows the corresponding fault causes as follows:

u The port status is normal: The subscriber is in an ongoing conversation.

u The line is interrupted: The subscriber does not pick up the phone and the port
status is abnormal.

u The line is shorted: The A and B of the subscriber line are connected and the
port status is abnormal.

u The line is not well insulated: It indicates the subscriber is grounded and the
port status is abnormal.

10-8 Version: A/1


10 Test Function

u The phone is not hung up well: The phone is not hung up and the port status is
abnormal.

u The line is shorted: The A and B of the subscriber line are connected with the
battery and the port status is abnormal.

10.3 Ping Test

The following introduces purpose and procedures of the Ping test.

10.3.1 Test Purpose

Ping is used to test the network connectivity. The AN5006-20 sends ICMP echo
request message to the destination IP address and reports whether it has received
the expected ICMP request respond. The test result shows the connection or
disconnection between two network devices, the packet loss rate and network delay,
etc.

10.3.2 Ping Test

The following introduces the operation method of the Ping test.

Procedure

1. On the ANM2000 menu bar click ConfigurationVoIP Ping Test.

2. In the VoIP Ping Test window, select the AN5006-20 system in the left pane.

3. Click Setting on the toolbar.

4. In the Parameter Setting dialog box, enter the destination IP address in the
Dest IP text box, as shown in Figure 10-9.

Version: A/1 10-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure 10-9 The Setting of Ping Test Parameters

Note:

See Table 10-1 for Ping test parameters.

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters

Parameter Description

Select this check box and set the quantity of Tx packets in the text box.
-n
The value ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4.

Select this check box and specify a timeout, in milliseconds, to wait for a
-w response. The value ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the default
value is 4000.
Select this check box and set the size of the packet in the text box (unit:
-l
byte). The value ranges from 0 to 65 500 and the default value is 32.

Select this check box and set the TTL value in the text box. The value
-i
ranges from 1 to 255 and the default value is 128.

Select this check box and set the TOS value in the text box. The value
-v
ranges from 0 to 255 and the default value is 0.

Select this check box and set the hop count of the routers sending and
-r receiving packets in the text box. The value ranges from 1 to 9 and the
default value is 1.

10-10 Version: A/1


10 Test Function

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description

Select this check box and set the timeslot of the route hop count in the
-s text box. It is similar to -r, but does not record the route via which the
packet returns. The value ranges from 1 to 4, and the default value is 1.

Select this check box and the user can ping the designated computer
-t
unless pressing down Ctrl + C to terminate.

Select this check box and the address can be analyzed to the host
-a
name.
Select this check box and the packet will not be split by gateway of the
-f
route.
Check this check box and the packet can list route based on the
designated computer in the Host IP group box. Consecutive computers
-j
can be divided by intermediate gateway (route sparse source) Up to 9
host IP addresses can be configured.

Check this check box and the packet can list route based on the
designated computer in the Host IP group box. Consecutive computers
-k
can be divided by intermediate gateway (route strict source) Up to 9
host IP addresses can be configured.

5. Click OK and return to the VoIP Ping Test window.

6. Click Start and the test result will be displayed in the right pane, as shown in
Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10 Ping Test

7. Click Stop and the ping test will be terminated.

10.3.3 Checking Test Result

The test result is displayed in the right pane of the VoIP Ping Test window after the
Ping test is completed. Users can view the following items in it.

Version: A/1 10-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result

Item Description

Object The equipment which runs the Ping command

Destination IP The IP address of the destination host


TxPacket The ICMP packet number sent from the equipment

RxPacket The ICMP packet number received by the equipment

The maximum delay from the time an ICMP packet is sent to the
Max Delay
time it returns
The minimum delay from the time an ICMP packet is sent to the
Min Delay
time it returns
The average delay from the time ICMP packets are sent to the time
Average Delay
they return

Number of lost packet / (Number of lost packet + Number of packets


Packet loss rate
received successfully)

10-12 Version: A/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

The following introduces the FTP functions and operation procedures in detail.

A.1 Overview of the Function

A computer is connected with the equipment via a network cable. Set up the FTP
server end on the computer; that is, install the WFTP software. When the equipment
needs to be upgraded, it needs to get the upgrade package from the FTP server
end via the FTP mode; when the equipment conducts the backup operation, it
needs to export the backup file to the FTP server end via the FTP mode.

A.2 Configuration Procedure

In the following paragraphs an example is given to introduce how to use the WFTP
software. Create an FTP user with the user name 1 and password 1. Also create a
path to store the upgrade / backup package as d:\ftp.

Procedure

1. At the FTP server end, set the path for saving the upgrade / backup package to
d:\ftp.

2. Open the WFTP, as shown in Figure A-1.

Version: A/1 A-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

Figure A -1 Opening the WFTP Software

3. Click SecurityUsers/Rights on the menu bar to start user setting, as shown


in Figure A-2.

Figure A -2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI

4. In the User/Rights Security Dialog window that appears subsequently, click


the New User button to add a new FTP user. This user will be used in the
subsequent upgrade and backup operations. Enter user name 1, as shown in
Figure A-3.

A-2 Version: A/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

Note:

Users may click the Delete button to delete an existing user, select an
existing user and click the Change Password button to change the
users password.

Figure A -3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1

5. Click OK and enter 1 for the new password. And then, click OK to complete the
new user creation, as shown in Figure A-4.

Figure A -4 Entering User Password 1

Version: A/1 A-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device EPON Configuration Guide

6. In the Home Directory text box of the User/Rights Security Dialog window,
enter the path where the upgrade / backup package is located. According to the
first step, here enter d:\ftp, as shown in Figure A-5.

Figure A -5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package

7. Click Done to complete the settings.

8. In the No log file open window, click LoggingLog Options to set the log
function of this WFTP, as shown in Figure A-6.

Figure A -6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool

9. Select all button boxes except for Winsock Calls in the Logging Options
window, as shown in Figure A-7.

A-4 Version: A/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

Figure A -7 Logging Options

10. Click OK to display the log. Users may use the log information to troubleshoot
and confirm whether the Gets or Puts operation is successful.

Now the WFTP configuration is completed.

Version: A/1 A-5


Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survery
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.

Documentation Name
Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:


1. How often do you use the documentation?
Frequently Rarely Never Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
in starting up a project in installing the product in daily maintenance in trouble
shooting Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
100% 80% 50% 0% Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
Satisfied Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
Print edition Electronic edition Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
Very Somewhat Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
Good Normal Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
Yes
No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
Yes
No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
Yes (Please give an example)
No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

Beautiful Unbeautiful (your advice)

Practical Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?


Beautiful Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com.cn

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi